
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Amy</id>
	<title>High5Wiki - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Amy"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Special:Contributions/Amy"/>
	<updated>2026-05-31T21:41:09Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.35.11</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Price_Books&amp;diff=5618</id>
		<title>Price Books</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Price_Books&amp;diff=5618"/>
		<updated>2014-12-12T23:54:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: /* Create a price book for a percentage markup over cost */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Price Books are used to assign customer specific pricing during order entry. You can assign a price book to a customer and all orders created for the customer will use the pricing rules assigned in the price books. An example of a price books is “30% higher than cost” or “10% less than retail”. You may also have a price book for customers that have special service pricing, different than your standard service prices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Price Books take precedence and drives the price on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a price book for a percentage markup over cost ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;50kCn6gewn8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select Price Book Editor and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       The Price Book Editor will display. Click New.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Type the name in the Price Book field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Fixed %&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       In Percentage, type the percentage.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Higher&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       In Based on, select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PriceBook_Markup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price Book for specific prices on inventory or service items  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;VbLweiuPRL8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select Price Book Editor and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       The Price Book Editor will display. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Type the name in the Price Book field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add From Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add inventory items to the price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Select the inventory items you want to add to the price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       Enter the special price book price in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Price&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column (circled in image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add From Services&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add service items to the price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10.   Select the service and back in the Price Book Editor, edit the price in the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Price&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.   Continue adding from inventory items and services items until you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12.   Click OK at the bottom of the Price Book Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PriceBook_StockPrice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assign Price Book to Customers ==&lt;br /&gt;
1.       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Open a customer record. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rates&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Locate the Price Book field and select the price book you want to assign to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AssignPriceBookToCustomer.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Service Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       In the order, select the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Material&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or New Service to select item that is on the price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       In the Add Items to Order window, notice two things (circled in image below):&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;a.       Locate the Price Book field (1). You should see that field auto-populated with the price book assigned to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;b.      Notice the price in the Price field (2). This price is calculated based off the rules setup in the price book. You can see the price change if you select a different price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PriceBookOnItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price Books Commissions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Item by Item Commissions&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can items to a price book and have a specific commission rate for each item or a specific flat commission for each item. When the pricebook is applied to an order or invoice, the commissions will be based on the PriceBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the example below, there is a PriceBook created called Commission Rates. In the Sales Commission % column you will see the commission % for the salesperson on each item. Notice you can have different rates for different items. Also notice in the Partner Discount column there is a flat rate for two of the items.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PBCommissions_ItemByItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If that PriceBook is assigned to an order and some of those items included in the PriceBooks are placed on the order, you will see the commissions populate on the Totals tab. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TotalsTab_PBCommissionTotals.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You will also see the commission on each individual item on the Commission tab. Open the Inventory, Service, or Labor tab. Click the Commission tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CommissionTabOnItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Total Order Commissions by PriceBooks&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If your salespeople, technician&amp;#039;s or partners receive a commission rate that varies depending on customer or specific orders, you can create multiple PriceBooks with the overall commission rate. Assign the correct rate to a customer record. Going forward, any order created for that customer will use the commission rates defined in the PriceBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the example below, there is a PriceBook called Commission Rates Fixed. Notice the commission rates are filled out for Salesperson and Partner. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PBCommissions_TotalOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;For every order that this PriceBook is applied to, these commission rates and fixed amounts will be used for every item placed on the order. The commissions will show on the Totals tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:FixedPBCommission.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5617</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5617"/>
		<updated>2014-12-12T23:54:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How stock is depleted&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;8VQyV5tQTvQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Vendor Items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;eizmr30xiHg&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to reduce inventory quantity using the reconciliation tool&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation does not reduce inventory quantity in QB. You will need to adjust qty in QuickBooks as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation doesn&amp;#039;t send a GL Entry to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;vCH19lxZFAo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning equipment from a customer back to inventory&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;plPq-1MCGnc&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning stock from inventory to vendor&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- You can only return available stock to a vendor. Stock that is reserved you cannot return to a vendor. First remove it from the order it is reserved on, then it will become available and you can add it to a vendor return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;qAwPUVhuEWo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Creating a PO from a Service Order&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;aY2kL9vQRCU&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Purchase Orders - Linking items from multiple service orders to one PO&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;mUiamTbT3EM&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to setting up and using warehouses&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;HAc4LfTbCtE&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Mobile Tech Preference Group Options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;_6-DmMgRyps&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using Price Books to charge special prices for specific service items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;VbLweiuPRL8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using Price Books to markup all inventory by percentage, but not service items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;50kCn6gewn8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Price_Books&amp;diff=5616</id>
		<title>Price Books</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Price_Books&amp;diff=5616"/>
		<updated>2014-12-12T23:10:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Price Books are used to assign customer specific pricing during order entry. You can assign a price book to a customer and all orders created for the customer will use the pricing rules assigned in the price books. An example of a price books is “30% higher than cost” or “10% less than retail”. You may also have a price book for customers that have special service pricing, different than your standard service prices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Price Books take precedence and drives the price on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a price book for a percentage markup over cost ==&lt;br /&gt;
1.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select Price Book Editor and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       The Price Book Editor will display. Click New.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Type the name in the Price Book field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Fixed %&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       In Percentage, type the percentage.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Higher&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       In Based on, select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PriceBook_Markup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price Book for specific prices on inventory or service items  ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;VbLweiuPRL8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select Price Book Editor and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       The Price Book Editor will display. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Type the name in the Price Book field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add From Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add inventory items to the price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Select the inventory items you want to add to the price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       Enter the special price book price in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Price&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column (circled in image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add From Services&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add service items to the price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10.   Select the service and back in the Price Book Editor, edit the price in the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Price&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.   Continue adding from inventory items and services items until you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12.   Click OK at the bottom of the Price Book Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PriceBook_StockPrice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assign Price Book to Customers ==&lt;br /&gt;
1.       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Open a customer record. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rates&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Locate the Price Book field and select the price book you want to assign to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AssignPriceBookToCustomer.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Service Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       In the order, select the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Material&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or New Service to select item that is on the price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       In the Add Items to Order window, notice two things (circled in image below):&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;a.       Locate the Price Book field (1). You should see that field auto-populated with the price book assigned to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;b.      Notice the price in the Price field (2). This price is calculated based off the rules setup in the price book. You can see the price change if you select a different price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PriceBookOnItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price Books Commissions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Item by Item Commissions&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can items to a price book and have a specific commission rate for each item or a specific flat commission for each item. When the pricebook is applied to an order or invoice, the commissions will be based on the PriceBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the example below, there is a PriceBook created called Commission Rates. In the Sales Commission % column you will see the commission % for the salesperson on each item. Notice you can have different rates for different items. Also notice in the Partner Discount column there is a flat rate for two of the items.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PBCommissions_ItemByItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If that PriceBook is assigned to an order and some of those items included in the PriceBooks are placed on the order, you will see the commissions populate on the Totals tab. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TotalsTab_PBCommissionTotals.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You will also see the commission on each individual item on the Commission tab. Open the Inventory, Service, or Labor tab. Click the Commission tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CommissionTabOnItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Total Order Commissions by PriceBooks&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If your salespeople, technician&amp;#039;s or partners receive a commission rate that varies depending on customer or specific orders, you can create multiple PriceBooks with the overall commission rate. Assign the correct rate to a customer record. Going forward, any order created for that customer will use the commission rates defined in the PriceBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the example below, there is a PriceBook called Commission Rates Fixed. Notice the commission rates are filled out for Salesperson and Partner. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PBCommissions_TotalOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;For every order that this PriceBook is applied to, these commission rates and fixed amounts will be used for every item placed on the order. The commissions will show on the Totals tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:FixedPBCommission.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Price_Books&amp;diff=5615</id>
		<title>Price Books</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Price_Books&amp;diff=5615"/>
		<updated>2014-12-12T23:10:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Price Books are used to assign customer specific pricing during order entry. You can assign a price book to a customer and all orders created for the customer will use the pricing rules assigned in the price books. An example of a price books is “30% higher than cost” or “10% less than retail”. You may also have a price book for customers that have special service pricing, different than your standard service prices.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;**NOTE**&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Price Books take precedence and drives the price on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;VbLweiuPRL8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Create a price book for a percentage markup over cost ==&lt;br /&gt;
1.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select Price Book Editor and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       The Price Book Editor will display. Click New.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Type the name in the Price Book field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Fixed %&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       In Percentage, type the percentage.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Higher&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       In Based on, select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PriceBook_Markup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price Book for specific prices on inventory or service items  ==&lt;br /&gt;
1.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select Price Book Editor and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       The Price Book Editor will display. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Type the name in the Price Book field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add From Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add inventory items to the price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       Select the inventory items you want to add to the price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       Enter the special price book price in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Price&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column (circled in image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add From Services&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add service items to the price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10.   Select the service and back in the Price Book Editor, edit the price in the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Price&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11.   Continue adding from inventory items and services items until you are finished.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12.   Click OK at the bottom of the Price Book Editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PriceBook_StockPrice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assign Price Book to Customers ==&lt;br /&gt;
1.       Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Open a customer record. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rates&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Locate the Price Book field and select the price book you want to assign to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AssignPriceBookToCustomer.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Service Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.       In the order, select the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Material&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or New Service to select item that is on the price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9.       In the Add Items to Order window, notice two things (circled in image below):&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;a.       Locate the Price Book field (1). You should see that field auto-populated with the price book assigned to the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;b.      Notice the price in the Price field (2). This price is calculated based off the rules setup in the price book. You can see the price change if you select a different price book.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PriceBookOnItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Price Books Commissions ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Item by Item Commissions&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can items to a price book and have a specific commission rate for each item or a specific flat commission for each item. When the pricebook is applied to an order or invoice, the commissions will be based on the PriceBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the example below, there is a PriceBook created called Commission Rates. In the Sales Commission % column you will see the commission % for the salesperson on each item. Notice you can have different rates for different items. Also notice in the Partner Discount column there is a flat rate for two of the items.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PBCommissions_ItemByItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If that PriceBook is assigned to an order and some of those items included in the PriceBooks are placed on the order, you will see the commissions populate on the Totals tab. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TotalsTab_PBCommissionTotals.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You will also see the commission on each individual item on the Commission tab. Open the Inventory, Service, or Labor tab. Click the Commission tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CommissionTabOnItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Total Order Commissions by PriceBooks&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If your salespeople, technician&amp;#039;s or partners receive a commission rate that varies depending on customer or specific orders, you can create multiple PriceBooks with the overall commission rate. Assign the correct rate to a customer record. Going forward, any order created for that customer will use the commission rates defined in the PriceBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the example below, there is a PriceBook called Commission Rates Fixed. Notice the commission rates are filled out for Salesperson and Partner. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PBCommissions_TotalOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;For every order that this PriceBook is applied to, these commission rates and fixed amounts will be used for every item placed on the order. The commissions will show on the Totals tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:FixedPBCommission.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5614</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5614"/>
		<updated>2014-12-12T23:08:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How stock is depleted&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;8VQyV5tQTvQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Vendor Items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;eizmr30xiHg&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to reduce inventory quantity using the reconciliation tool&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation does not reduce inventory quantity in QB. You will need to adjust qty in QuickBooks as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation doesn&amp;#039;t send a GL Entry to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;vCH19lxZFAo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning equipment from a customer back to inventory&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;plPq-1MCGnc&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning stock from inventory to vendor&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- You can only return available stock to a vendor. Stock that is reserved you cannot return to a vendor. First remove it from the order it is reserved on, then it will become available and you can add it to a vendor return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;qAwPUVhuEWo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Creating a PO from a Service Order&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;aY2kL9vQRCU&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Purchase Orders - Linking items from multiple service orders to one PO&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;mUiamTbT3EM&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to setting up and using warehouses&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;HAc4LfTbCtE&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Mobile Tech Preference Group Options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;_6-DmMgRyps&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Using Price Books to charge special prices for specific service items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;VbLweiuPRL8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5613</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5613"/>
		<updated>2014-12-10T22:46:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How stock is depleted&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;8VQyV5tQTvQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Vendor Items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;eizmr30xiHg&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to reduce inventory quantity using the reconciliation tool&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation does not reduce inventory quantity in QB. You will need to adjust qty in QuickBooks as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation doesn&amp;#039;t send a GL Entry to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;vCH19lxZFAo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning equipment from a customer back to inventory&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;plPq-1MCGnc&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning stock from inventory to vendor&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- You can only return available stock to a vendor. Stock that is reserved you cannot return to a vendor. First remove it from the order it is reserved on, then it will become available and you can add it to a vendor return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;qAwPUVhuEWo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Creating a PO from a Service Order&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;aY2kL9vQRCU&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Purchase Orders - Linking items from multiple service orders to one PO&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;mUiamTbT3EM&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to setting up and using warehouses&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;HAc4LfTbCtE&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Mobile Tech Preference Group Options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;_6-DmMgRyps&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5612</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5612"/>
		<updated>2014-12-10T21:01:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How stock is depleted&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;8VQyV5tQTvQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Vendor Items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;eizmr30xiHg&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to reduce inventory quantity using the reconciliation tool&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation does not reduce inventory quantity in QB. You will need to adjust qty in QuickBooks as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation doesn&amp;#039;t send a GL Entry to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;vCH19lxZFAo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning equipment from a customer back to inventory&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;plPq-1MCGnc&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning stock from inventory to vendor&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- You can only return available stock to a vendor. Stock that is reserved you cannot return to a vendor. First remove it from the order it is reserved on, then it will become available and you can add it to a vendor return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;qAwPUVhuEWo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Creating a PO from a Service Order&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;aY2kL9vQRCU&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Purchase Orders - Linking items from multiple service orders to one PO&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;mUiamTbT3EM&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Mobile Tech Preference Group Options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;_6-DmMgRyps&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5611</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5611"/>
		<updated>2014-12-10T19:06:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How stock is depleted&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;8VQyV5tQTvQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Vendor Items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;eizmr30xiHg&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to reduce inventory quantity using the reconciliation tool&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation does not reduce inventory quantity in QB. You will need to adjust qty in QuickBooks as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation doesn&amp;#039;t send a GL Entry to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;vCH19lxZFAo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning equipment from a customer back to inventory&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;plPq-1MCGnc&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning stock from inventory to vendor&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- You can only return available stock to a vendor. Stock that is reserved you cannot return to a vendor. First remove it from the order it is reserved on, then it will become available and you can add it to a vendor return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;qAwPUVhuEWo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Creating a PO from a Service Order&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;aY2kL9vQRCU&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Creating a PO from a Service Order&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;mUiamTbT3EM&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Mobile Tech Preference Group Options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;_6-DmMgRyps&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5610</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5610"/>
		<updated>2014-12-10T18:54:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How stock is depleted&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;8VQyV5tQTvQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Vendor Items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;eizmr30xiHg&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to reduce inventory quantity using the reconciliation tool&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation does not reduce inventory quantity in QB. You will need to adjust qty in QuickBooks as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation doesn&amp;#039;t send a GL Entry to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;vCH19lxZFAo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning equipment from a customer back to inventory&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;plPq-1MCGnc&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning stock from inventory to vendor&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- You can only return available stock to a vendor. Stock that is reserved you cannot return to a vendor. First remove it from the order it is reserved on, then it will become available and you can add it to a vendor return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;qAwPUVhuEWo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Creating a PO from a Service Order&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;aY2kL9vQRCU&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Mobile Tech Preference Group Options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;_6-DmMgRyps&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5606</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5606"/>
		<updated>2014-12-10T17:57:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How stock is depleted&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;8VQyV5tQTvQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Vendor Items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;eizmr30xiHg&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to reduce inventory quantity using the reconciliation tool&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation does not reduce inventory quantity in QB. You will need to adjust qty in QuickBooks as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation doesn&amp;#039;t send a GL Entry to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;vCH19lxZFAo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning equipment from a customer back to inventory&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;plPq-1MCGnc&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning stock from inventory to vendor&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- You can only return available stock to a vendor. Stock that is reserved you cannot return to a vendor. First remove it from the order it is reserved on, then it will become available and you can add it to a vendor return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;qAwPUVhuEWo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Mobile Tech Preference Group Options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;_6-DmMgRyps&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5605</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5605"/>
		<updated>2014-12-10T17:56:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How stock is depleted&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;8VQyV5tQTvQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Vendor Items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;eizmr30xiHg&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to reduce inventory quantity using the reconciliation tool&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation does not reduce inventory quantity in QB. You will need to adjust qty in QuickBooks as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation doesn&amp;#039;t send a GL Entry to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;vCH19lxZFAo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning equipment from a customer back to inventory&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;plPq-1MCGnc&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning stock from inventory to vendor&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- You can only return available stock to a vendor. Stock that is reserved you cannot return to a vendor. First remove it from the order it is reserved on, then it will become available and you can add it to a vendor return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;qAwPUVhuEWo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Mobile Tech Preference Group Options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;_6-DmMgRyps&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5604</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5604"/>
		<updated>2014-12-10T17:56:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How stock is depleted&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;8VQyV5tQTvQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Vendor Items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;eizmr30xiHg&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to reduce inventory quantity using the reconciliation tool&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation does not reduce inventory quantity in QB. You will need to adjust qty in QuickBooks as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- reducing qty in SME using reconciliation doesn&amp;#039;t send a GL Entry to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;vCH19lxZFAo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning equipment from a customer back to inventory&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;plPq-1MCGnc&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning stock from inventory to vendor&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
- You can only return available stock to a vendor. Stock that is reserved you cannot return to a vendor. First remove it from the order it is reserved on, then it will become available and you can add it to a vendor return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;qAwPUVhuEWo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Mobile Tech Preference Group Options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;_6-DmMgRyps&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5603</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5603"/>
		<updated>2014-12-10T17:49:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How stock is depleted&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;8VQyV5tQTvQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Vendor Items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;eizmr30xiHg&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to reduce inventory quantity using the reconciliation tool&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;vCH19lxZFAo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning equipment from a customer back to inventory&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;plPq-1MCGnc&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning stock from inventory to vendor&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;qAwPUVhuEWo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Mobile Tech Preference Group Options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;_6-DmMgRyps&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5602</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5602"/>
		<updated>2014-12-10T17:28:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How stock is depleted&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;8VQyV5tQTvQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Vendor Items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;eizmr30xiHg&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to reduce inventory quantity using the reconciliation tool&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;vCH19lxZFAo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to returning equipment from a customer back to inventory&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;plPq-1MCGnc&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Mobile Tech Preference Group Options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;_6-DmMgRyps&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5600</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5600"/>
		<updated>2014-12-10T00:41:29Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How stock is depleted&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;8VQyV5tQTvQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Vendor Items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;eizmr30xiHg&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Mobile Tech Preference Group Options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;_6-DmMgRyps&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to reduce inventory quantity using the reconciliation tool&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;vCH19lxZFAo&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5599</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5599"/>
		<updated>2014-12-09T23:39:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How stock is depleted&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;8VQyV5tQTvQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Vendor Items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;eizmr30xiHg&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Mobile Tech Preference Group Options&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;_6-DmMgRyps&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5598</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5598"/>
		<updated>2014-12-08T22:58:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How stock is depleted&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;8VQyV5tQTvQ&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Vendor Items&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;eizmr30xiHg&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5597</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5597"/>
		<updated>2014-12-08T22:50:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Customizing Search View Basics&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;O5gbnenlsaw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Combined Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;kLvSfikaTd4&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Intro to Partial Invoice&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;PoiJmQfSVHI&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is a JIT Count?&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;FAZIi7C9CZA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5596</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5596"/>
		<updated>2014-12-08T22:37:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to copy a standard report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;How to remove a report from the Print/Email menu&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;UlhcWT_hl78&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Basic report formatting in Report Designer (example is on an invoice report)&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;A4WDCZNDY48&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Troubleshooting why orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch calendar&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;smLzkuMvJcA&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5595</id>
		<title>Short Videos</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Short_Videos&amp;diff=5595"/>
		<updated>2014-12-08T22:22:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: Created page with &amp;quot;How to Duplicate a Standard Report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; &amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;How to Duplicate a Standard Report&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;uUNP5VqN2X8&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Wiki_Books&amp;diff=5594</id>
		<title>Wiki Books</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Wiki_Books&amp;diff=5594"/>
		<updated>2014-12-08T22:21:27Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;*[[SME Maintenance]]	&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SME 7.1 New Features &amp;amp; Functionality]]	&lt;br /&gt;
*[[High 5 Wiki]]	&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SQLink - SME to QuickBooks synchronization]]	&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SME - Inventory Module]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SME - Customers Module]]	&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SME - Setup Module]]	&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SME - Search and Navigate]]	&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SME - Help Desk Module]]	&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SME - Receivables Module]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SME - Reports Module]]	&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SME - Service &amp;amp; Install Module]]	&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SME - Dispatch Window]]	&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SME - Custom Tabs and Fields]]	&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Updating from SME 7.0 to 7.1 - New Features]]	&lt;br /&gt;
*[[SME Tech Portal Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Accounting FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[SME Tips and Tricks]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Leads]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Proposals]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[SMP_  Items]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Report preview generating too many pages]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Discounts]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Adding Item Repair Equipment to Order Item Report]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Application is not signed]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[SLA Category]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Decimal Spaces]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Stop and Restart SQL Service]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Drop down fields not working]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[TechPortal Improvements]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Add Unit Price to Order Item Report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Licensing Issues]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[CustomerPortal - Can&amp;#039;t add order]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[QuickBooks Syncing Role FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Maintenance Update - 7.2.8.99]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Prepaid Labor and Services]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Prepaid Services]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Maintaining Inventory in SME - Use General Ledger Entries for Default Material]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[SQLink Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Steps to create a new user profile]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Barcode Reconciliation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Auditing for SME Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Late Fees / Finance Charges]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Set up of initial company data connection]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Lock Taxes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[SQLink Help Files]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Getting Started]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Prepaid Hours]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Inventory Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[SME 8.0 - New Features and Functionality]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[SME Mobile Master - Assign User Names]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[SME Mobile]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[SME  Mobile - Setting Preferences]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Setting Up SME Client Users]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Recreating Inventory Detail Utility]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[SME and SQL Express]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Payment Syncing]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Next / Prior Buttons]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[TechPortal for SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[TechPortal Settings]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[TechService on Android for SME]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Short Videos]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Module_Guides&amp;diff=5593</id>
		<title>SME Module Guides</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Module_Guides&amp;diff=5593"/>
		<updated>2014-12-04T16:56:54Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{|style= cellpadding=&amp;quot;8&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:CustomersIcon.png]] &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Customers module]] tracks every aspect &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;of your most valuable asset, your customers.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Customers]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Maintenance Contracts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Customer Equipment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InventoryIcon.png]]  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Inventory Management]] provides a complete&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;collection of comprehensive inventory control tools&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;allowing you to quickly and easily&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; manage your entire inventory&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory Setup]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Material Allocation]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Packages]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Services]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Vendors]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Purchase Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[PO Cost Adjustments]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Warehouses]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Returns]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Transfers]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Inventory Quantity Reconciliation]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Setup SME to fit your business. Setup User&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Groups, assign usernames and passwords.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Company]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Default Export to QuickBooks Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User Groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Users]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[User Preferences]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SME Lookup Lists]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Email Settings]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatching Technicians&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Learn about the different ways available to schedule&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;and [[dispatch]] your technicians.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dispatch Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:ServiceOrdersIcon.png]] &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service and Install Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Create [[service or install orders]] for your customers.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Also setup recurring service orders.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Service &amp;amp; Install Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Labor Editor Defaults]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Add Items to Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Changing Material Quantities on Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Discounts]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dispatch Guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recurring Orders]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Projects]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Prepaid Hours]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Tech Compliance]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Lock Taxes]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InvoicesIcon.png]] &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receivables Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Convert service orders to [[invoices]] or create a new&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;itemized invoice. Setup recurring&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;invoices linked to maintenance contracts.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Invoicing]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Editing a Combined Invoice]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Payments]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Recurring Invoices]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Syncing SME Invoices with QuickBooks]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Batch Print/Email Invoices]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Late Fees / Finance Charges]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Post Credit to Invoice]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReportsIcon.png]] &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reports Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Learn how to copy a standard report and customize&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;to fit your business&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Reporting]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Duplicating Standard Reports for Custom Use]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding Barcodes to Reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Adding Item Repair Equipment to Order Item Report]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Add TechPortal Signature to Order Report]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Wrap Description column in Order Item Reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Add Custom Fields to Report]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Creating Drop Downs for Reports]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SME and QuickBooks Sync&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Synchronization between SME with [[QuickBooks]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;for a full business solution&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SQLink]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SQLink Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SQLink FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Common SQLink Errors]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SMP_ Items]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[GL Entries for SME Inventory]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Default Export to QuickBooks Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[PO Cost Adjustments]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Payment Syncing]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Searching and Navigating&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Search Window]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Lookup Menu]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Navigate Button]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Next / Prior Buttons]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Arrange Grids]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Delete/ Manage Search Views]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Common / Other&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;There are tools in SME you will use throughout&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;all the modules. &lt;br /&gt;
* [[Activities]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Stored Documents]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Custom Tabs and Fields]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Price Books]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Notes]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[SLA Category]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Help Desk Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Track issues and build your knowledge base in the &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Help Desk module.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Help Desk]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales Module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Track leads and proposals in the &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[Sales module]].&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Leads]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Proposals]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QuickStart.pdf]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
High 5 Wiki &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
#[[Welcome to High5 Wiki]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the [[Wiki Books]] link for a more organized grouping of information.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Labor_Editor_Defaults&amp;diff=5580</id>
		<title>Labor Editor Defaults</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Labor_Editor_Defaults&amp;diff=5580"/>
		<updated>2014-11-20T17:31:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: /* Billing Status field */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;BmvGv9jdfP0&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; When adding Labor to an order or an invoice, you can setup default values for the Unit Cost and Unit Price fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:LaborEditor_Cost_Price_Defaults.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Labor Unit Price Defaults ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Service item selected in the Labor Item will drive the Unit Price in the Labor Editor. You can set a default Service Item for your technicians.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Labor_ServiceItemDrivesPrice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Search for your technician&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Select their default service item in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. When you select that tech in a labor item, the service item will default to what is set as their default. You can always change the service item, this is simply their default.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Technician_DefaultServiceItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To edit the service item rate, go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Search for the service item. Edit the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Retail&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ServiceItemRetailField.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; If you enter a Wage Rate value in the Technician Settings tab, that amount will populate the labor editor when the tech is selected. Please note, if you select a service item, the “wage rate” amount will be overwritten. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If no service item is selected on the labor item, the labor line on the invoice that goes to QuickBooks will pass through SMP_Labor or the item you choose in the Default Labor Line Item in SQLink &amp;gt; Invoice/Proposal Options tab (image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SQLink_DefaultLaborLineItemSetting.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:LaborPassingThroughSMP_Labor_QB.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; If you do not tax labor, make sure you go into QB and change the SMP_Labor to the tax code of Non. In SME &amp;gt; Inventory module &amp;gt; Services, search for SMP_Labor and make sure non-taxable is checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QB_SMP_Labor_SetToNonTax.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SME_SMP_Item_setToNonTaxable.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Labor Unit Cost Defaults ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Payroll Item drives Labor Cost&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payroll Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; selected in the Labor Editor drives the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unit Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:LaborEditor_DrivesUnitCost.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To setup a payroll item for your technician, go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payroll/Wage items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to open the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Wage Item Editor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Your payroll Items from QuickBooks will be imported into SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Search for the Payroll Item you want to edit. Add the technicians by clicking &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add From Techs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Wage Amount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:WageItemEditor_SetupPayrollItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Option for Service Item to drive Labor Cost&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to overwrite the payroll cost with the cost of the service item selected in the Labor, you need check a setting in the Setup module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:OverridePayrollCost.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Override payroll cost from service item on labor records&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Now when entering labor, the service item will drive the price and also the cost of the labor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Tech Wage Cost field drives Labor Cost&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&amp;#039;t want to use Payroll Item, the value in the technicians Wage Cost field populates the Unit Cost field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and search for your tech. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. Enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Wage Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Remember, if there is a Payroll Item selected on the Labor Editor, the Wage Cost will be overwritten by the Payroll Item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Technician_WageCostSetting.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Billing Status field ==&lt;br /&gt;
On the labor item, there is a Billing Status field that drives the billing quantity field. The billing status could be one of the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-  Billing Hours equal to Scheduled Hours&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-  Billing Hours are fixed (user entered)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-  Billing Hours equal actual time tracking hours (hours timed using the time tracker on SME Mobile Tech)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:BillingStatus_EqualScheduled.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Billing status on labor replaces the checkbox “Equal Billable to make scheduled = billable”&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:BillingStatus_LaborEditor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Setup New Billing Status&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Setup your Billing Status drop down values by going to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Find Billing Status and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:BillingStatus_New.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the Code Editor that opens, enter a name and choose one of the three options (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:BillingStatusOptions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Assign Billing Status&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Billing status can be set as default in following areas:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Set a default on any new customer created: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Defaults&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Rates and Charges Defaults&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.  This will allow setting of a default billing status for any newly generated customers.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-  Set a default on a customer:  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rates&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.  Once set all orders created for this customer will have this default billing status&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-  Set on an individual order: Service or Install Orders&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Details and Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.  Once billing status is set, all new labor created will use this billing status but it can be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-  Set on individual labor items: Service or Install Orders&amp;gt; Order Items&amp;gt; Labor.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:BillingStatusOptions.png&amp;diff=5579</id>
		<title>File:BillingStatusOptions.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:BillingStatusOptions.png&amp;diff=5579"/>
		<updated>2014-11-20T17:28:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:BillingStatus_New.png&amp;diff=5578</id>
		<title>File:BillingStatus New.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:BillingStatus_New.png&amp;diff=5578"/>
		<updated>2014-11-20T17:27:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Labor_Editor_Defaults&amp;diff=5577</id>
		<title>Labor Editor Defaults</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Labor_Editor_Defaults&amp;diff=5577"/>
		<updated>2014-11-20T17:17:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;BmvGv9jdfP0&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; When adding Labor to an order or an invoice, you can setup default values for the Unit Cost and Unit Price fields.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:LaborEditor_Cost_Price_Defaults.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Labor Unit Price Defaults ==&lt;br /&gt;
The Service item selected in the Labor Item will drive the Unit Price in the Labor Editor. You can set a default Service Item for your technicians.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Labor_ServiceItemDrivesPrice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Search for your technician&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Select their default service item in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. When you select that tech in a labor item, the service item will default to what is set as their default. You can always change the service item, this is simply their default.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Technician_DefaultServiceItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To edit the service item rate, go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Search for the service item. Edit the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Retail&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ServiceItemRetailField.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; If you enter a Wage Rate value in the Technician Settings tab, that amount will populate the labor editor when the tech is selected. Please note, if you select a service item, the “wage rate” amount will be overwritten. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If no service item is selected on the labor item, the labor line on the invoice that goes to QuickBooks will pass through SMP_Labor or the item you choose in the Default Labor Line Item in SQLink &amp;gt; Invoice/Proposal Options tab (image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SQLink_DefaultLaborLineItemSetting.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:LaborPassingThroughSMP_Labor_QB.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; If you do not tax labor, make sure you go into QB and change the SMP_Labor to the tax code of Non. In SME &amp;gt; Inventory module &amp;gt; Services, search for SMP_Labor and make sure non-taxable is checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QB_SMP_Labor_SetToNonTax.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SME_SMP_Item_setToNonTaxable.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Labor Unit Cost Defaults ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Payroll Item drives Labor Cost&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payroll Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; selected in the Labor Editor drives the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unit Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:LaborEditor_DrivesUnitCost.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To setup a payroll item for your technician, go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Payroll/Wage items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to open the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Wage Item Editor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Your payroll Items from QuickBooks will be imported into SME&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Search for the Payroll Item you want to edit. Add the technicians by clicking &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add From Techs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Wage Amount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:WageItemEditor_SetupPayrollItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Option for Service Item to drive Labor Cost&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to overwrite the payroll cost with the cost of the service item selected in the Labor, you need check a setting in the Setup module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:OverridePayrollCost.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Override payroll cost from service item on labor records&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Now when entering labor, the service item will drive the price and also the cost of the labor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Tech Wage Cost field drives Labor Cost&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you don&amp;#039;t want to use Payroll Item, the value in the technicians Wage Cost field populates the Unit Cost field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and search for your tech. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. Enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Wage Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Remember, if there is a Payroll Item selected on the Labor Editor, the Wage Cost will be overwritten by the Payroll Item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Technician_WageCostSetting.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Billing Status field ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Billing status options to charge Fixed hours, scheduled hours, or actual time tracking hours.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:BillingStatus_EqualScheduled.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Billing status on labor replaces the checkbox “Equal Billable to make scheduled = billable”&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:BillingStatus_LaborEditor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Billing status can be set as default in following areas:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Setup&amp;gt;Company&amp;gt;Customer Defaults&amp;gt;Rates and Charges Defaults.  This will allow setting of a default billing status for any newly generated customers.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Customer&amp;gt;Rates.  Once set all orders created for this customer will have this default billing status&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Service or Install Orders&amp;gt;Details and Settings.  Once billing status is set, all new labor created will use this billing status but it can be changed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-Service or Install Orders&amp;gt;Order Items&amp;gt;Labor.  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Returns&amp;diff=5545</id>
		<title>Returns</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Returns&amp;diff=5545"/>
		<updated>2014-10-21T20:51:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;RMA (Return Material Authorization) is used to return items either from a customer equipment list to your stock OR from your stock to the vendor. If parts need to move from customer to vendor, this requires two RMA transactions, one from customer to stock and another one from stock to vendor. SME does not always handle the accounting side of RMA&amp;#039;s so you need to manage the credits to customer or from vendors. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In order for items to be able to be returned from your customer to your inventory, the items must be delivered/ sold from your stock. The Item status cannot be &amp;quot;has jit items&amp;quot;. Review the [[Material Allocation]] page to understand how to reserve stock and how stock is depleted from inventory and marked as delivered or sold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Return Material from Customer Site back to Inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate a return for bringing customer equipment that has been invoiced back into inventory. You can start a return from the Customer Equipment Module, directly in the return module, or by entering the invoice number the material was on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Return from Customer Equipment&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Customer Equipment that has been invoiced can be returned from your customer back to your inventory. You can check to see if the equipment was invoiced by opening the equipment and checking the Link Status. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module and search for the customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Right click on the equipment you want to return&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Retire Remove / Retire&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to jump to new RMA&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) In the RMA, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Select the item on the grid and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) In the Receive Return Items window, make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent Removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If the material is serialized :&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the serial number in the Receive Stock tab and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If non-serialized item:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Received Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Receive Stock tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) The RMA will close.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) Go to the Customer Equipment and notice the status of the equipment you returned is now &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Retired&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11) Go to the inventory item and click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Material Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. If it was a serialized item you can locate the serial number and notice the serialized stock is now available in your warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Return from Returns module by Invoice Number&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the invoice number the material you are returning is on, you can enter the invoice number on the return and pull the material on the invoice onto the return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Returns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;From Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Select the customer in window that opens&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) On the return, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Return&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) In the window that opens, enter the invoice number&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:EnterInvoiceNumber_CustomerEQReturn.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) The window that opens show the invoice. Double click on it to select&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:REturnByInvoiceNum_SelectInvoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) In the next window, select the material you want to return on that invoice and the material will be added to the return on the Return Items tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReturnItemsTab_MaterialAddedFromInvoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) On the Return Items tab, select the material you want to return and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent Removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and notice the warehouse that the material will be returned into. Change as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If the material is serialized :&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the serial number in the Receive Stock tab and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If non-serialized item:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Received Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Receive Stock tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CheckPermanentRemoval.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11) If you want to credit the invoice the material was on, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Credit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, otherwise click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete the return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:EnterCreditAmount.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12) Enter the amount to be credited in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Credit Amount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. When all items are returned, you can click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to close the order in the window that opens&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14) Go back to the invoice that was credited. If you want the invoice to update the invoice in QB, check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export to QB&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CheckexportToQBOnCreditedInvoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Return from Returns module search for material&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can initiate a return from the returns module by searching for equipment that has been invoiced for a customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Returns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;From Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Select the customer in window that opens&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select from Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ClickSelectFromCustomerEquipment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) In the window that opens, select the equipment you want to return. The equipment must be invoiced to be able to return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) In the Enter Items to be returned window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ClickOKInSelectEquipmentWindow.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) Click the the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and the equipment selected will show on the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) Select the item and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11) In the Receive Return Item window, check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent Removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If the material is serialized :&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the serial number in the Receive Stock tab and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If non-serialized item:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Received Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Receive Stock tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReceiveReturnItemsWindow_CheckPermRemoval.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the prompt to close the return.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt; I can&amp;#039;t find the item that I need to return &amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In order to be able to put the equipment on a return it has to be Equipment and it has to have been allocated/reserved and invoiced. If you aren&amp;#039;t seeing it show up in the list of material to add to the return, it is probably not invoiced or not equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; do you see the equipment there? If not, it isn&amp;#039;t equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CheckToSeeIfEQ.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If it is showing as equipment, you can open it up and look at it&amp;#039;s Link Status. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:LinkStatusSoldInvoiced.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If it isn&amp;#039;t showing in customer equipment, the item will need to be marked as equipment to return. You can mark the material as equipment by going to the  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer List&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  tab &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Look at the non-equipment list or all (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Double click the item you want to return and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Piece&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TurnIntoEquipmentPIece.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create a credit invoice for customer equipment returned==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Create a Credit Invoice for Material/Equipment Returned&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Credit Invoice created in SME will sync to QuickBooks as a Credit Memo. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In this example, I had item VP20W-C on a service order and it was fully invoiced&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:FullyInvoicedMaterialForReturn.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;I can now create a return to bring it back into stock and create a credit invoice that will go over to QuickBooks as a Credit Memo.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Go to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Returns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;From Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Choose the customer in the search window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on that tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:NewOnReturnItemsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) In the window that opens, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select from Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) A list of all the equipment at the customer site that has been fully invoiced will show. Select the material&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add it to the Return Items tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) On the Return Items tab, select/highlight the item you are returning and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) In the Receive Returned Items window, make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent Removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Credit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab (Image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReceiveReturnedItemsCreditTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12) Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Credit Amount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. Enter the pre-tax dollar amount you are crediting.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13) Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create Credit Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the Item will be returned&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab on the return&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;16) Locate the line on the grid for &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Created Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;17) Right click on that line and select&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Jump to Credit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReturnItemDetailsJumpToCredit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;18)  SME will jump to the Invoicing module to the credit invoice (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReturnInvoiceCredit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--Notice the Invoice type on the invoice is credit &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--Also notice the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export to QuickBooks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; flag is checked. This Credit invoice will sync to QuickBooks as a Credit Memo on your next sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--Below is a screenshot of the Credit Memo in QuickBooks for this example. QuickBooks will pick the next Credit Memo number to assign to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CreditMemoCreatedFromReturn.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Credit the original invoice for the material and set it to sync&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You can credit the original invoice and sync the credited invoice back to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select from &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Select customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Return&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:REturn_ActionsCustomerReturn.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Enter the Invoice Number and click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) In the search window that opens, select the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) In the next window, select the equipment to return from the material listed on the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and you will find the equipment listed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) Select the equipment and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:POItems_ReceiveItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) In the Receive Returned Items window, make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Credits&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Return_EnteringTheCreditAmount.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11) Enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;credit amount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The Credited Invoice # will be populated&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - You must know what you have set on your SMP_Credit Item in QuickBooks so you know if you need to enter the material amount only or the material amount plus tax for the material in the Credit Amount. To check, open QuickBooks. Click Lists &amp;gt; Item List. Open SMP_Credit and note the Tax Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMP_Credit_TaxCode.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Receive Returned Items window. The Return will close.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13) Go to the invoice number you credited to see the balance change. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14) Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export to QuickBooks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to update the QB invoice with the credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CreditedQBInvoice_SMP_CreditItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - if your SMP_Credit item Tax Code is set to TAX, then the SME Invoice balance will retain the tax on the material. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TAxBalanceStillOnSMEInvoiceFormaterialTax.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To clear out the remaining balance for the tax on the SME Invoice, do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Go to the service order with the material you are returning.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Edit the material&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Non-Taxable&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the Material&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Taxes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Uncheck &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lock Taxes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Refresh Tax Rates&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Now the taxes will be cleared out of the SME invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMEInvoiceBalanceZeroAfterMaterialNonTaxable.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Replace Customer Equipment ==&lt;br /&gt;
Returns allow you to return customer equipment and replace with other material in your warehouses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Replacing serialized equipment with another serial number in stock in your warehouses&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1) Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module and search for your customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Right click on Equipment&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Replace&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to jump to new RMA&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) In RMA, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Select the stock and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) In the Receive Return Items window, notice Replace Item is checked. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) In the Select Replacement Part window that opens, locate the part/ serial number you want to use as replacement.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) You will be notified that the item has been reserved for the original order. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:NewREservedItemMessage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) The RMA will close.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11) Go back to Customer Equipment and locate the item on the EQ list. Notice the item you brought back to stock has the equipment status of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Retired&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and another line for the new serial number is entered with a status of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Replacement&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:RetiredAndREplacement.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Replace non-serialized equipment with another from your stock&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1) Go to Customer Equipment module and search for your customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Right click on the Equipment&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Replace&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustEQ_ReturnReplace.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to jump to the new RMA&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) On the return, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Select the equipment on the tab and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReturnItemsTab_ClickReceiveItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) In the Receive Return Items window, notice &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Replace Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and that item will be returned to your warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) The Select Replacement Part window opens. Select the stock you want to use as replacement.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) A message will tell you all items have been received. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to close the return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AllItemsReceived_REplacement.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) Go back to customer equipment module to see the original equipment with the status of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Retired&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the new equipment added as &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Replacement&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:NonSerializedReplacementInCustEQ.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Return Material in Inventory back to the Vendor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Returns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select the Vendor you are returning to in the Search window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. In the return, select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReturnItemsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select From Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Enter Items to be returned&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Select the material you are returning in the Select Inventory Item window. If it is serialized, write down the serial number because you have to enter it later.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. Make sure the quantity is correct and Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the return. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReceiveItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11. In the Receive Return Items window, check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent Removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*        If serialized item: enter the serial number in the Receive Stock tab and click Add. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*        If non-serialized item, enter the Received Quantity in the Receive Stock tab. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12. You will be prompted with “all items have been received, close return? Click the order?”  Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Bring material back into inventory from Vendor&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If your vendor sends you back the material you removed from inventory, you can re-add the material to inventory. On the PO Items tab, right click on the material that was sent back. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor Return&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (image below). The material will be added to your stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VendorReturn_POItemsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Returning serialized item from customer to vendor and swapping with a new serial number ==&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1: Return Serial Number from Customer Equipment back to your stock&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Step 2: Return serial number from your stock to vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Step 3: Create PO to vendor to bring another serial number back to stock&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Step 4: Create a service order to put the new serial number back at the customer site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Step 1: Return Serial Number from Customer Equipment back to your stock&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can follow steps to return serialized equipment from customer stock as described previously on this page where you can see multiple options, or follow steps below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Go to Customer Equipment&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Right click on the Equipment&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Remove/Retire&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to jump to new RMA&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) In RMA, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Select the item on the grid and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) In the Receive Return Items window make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent Removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) The RMA will close.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) Go to the Customer Equipment and notice the status of the equipment you returned is now Retired.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) Go to the inventor item, click the Material Details tab. Locate the serial number and notice the serialized stock is now available in your warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Step 2: Return serial number from your stock to vendor&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1) In RMA, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Select the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) In the Enter Items to be Returned window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select from Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) In the Select inventory item window, select the material you need to return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) In the next window that opens, select the serial number for the stock you need to return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) On the Return Items tab, select the stock on the grid and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) In the Receive Returned Items window, check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent Removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) The RMA will close. The serialized material is out of your stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Step 3: Create PO to vendor to bring another serial number back to stock&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1) Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the vendor.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PO Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;I&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button and select the inventory item you need to bring into stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ClickTheIButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) Make sure the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; are correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) On the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PO Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, select the material on the grid and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) In the Receive PO Items window, enter the serial number in field circled below. Click Add to the right of the field and click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PO_EnterSerialNumberREceived.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) The PO will close and the serialized stock is in your warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Step 4: Create a service order to put the new serial number back at the customer site.&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1) Create a new service order for the customer that needs the new serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) On the Order Items tab, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Material&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Select the material&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) In the Add Items to Order window, make sure the price is correct. Make sure A&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;dd to Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Stock Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Select the serial number you want to reserve.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Items to Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; the Service Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Close Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; the order. The serial number is taken out of your stock and you will see it on the customer’s equipment list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print the Return ==&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print/Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:printticket.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select Standard Return Ticket by Ship From.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click the printer icon in the print preview window to print the ticket.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Returns&amp;diff=5544</id>
		<title>Returns</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Returns&amp;diff=5544"/>
		<updated>2014-10-21T20:49:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;RMA (Return Material Authorization) is used to return items either from a customer equipment list to your stock OR from your stock to the vendor. If parts need to move from customer to vendor, this requires two RMA transactions, one from customer to stock and another one from stock to vendor. SME does not always handle the accounting side of RMA&amp;#039;s so you need to manage the credits to customer or from vendors. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In order for items to be able to be returned from your customer to your inventory, the items must be delivered/ sold from your stock. The Item status cannot be &amp;quot;has jit items&amp;quot;. Review the [[Material Allocation]] page to understand how to reserve stock and how stock is depleted from inventory and marked as delivered or sold.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Return Material from Customer Site back to Inventory ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can generate a return for bringing customer equipment that has been invoiced back into inventory. You can start a return from the Customer Equipment Module, directly in the return module, or by entering the invoice number the material was on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Return from Customer Equipment&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Customer Equipment that has been invoiced can be returned from your customer back to your inventory. You can check to see if the equipment was invoiced by opening the equipment and checking the Link Status. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module and search for the customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Right click on the equipment you want to return&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Retire Remove / Retire&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to jump to new RMA&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) In the RMA, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Select the item on the grid and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) In the Receive Return Items window, make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent Removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If the material is serialized :&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the serial number in the Receive Stock tab and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If non-serialized item:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Received Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Receive Stock tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) The RMA will close.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) Go to the Customer Equipment and notice the status of the equipment you returned is now &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Retired&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11) Go to the inventory item and click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Material Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. If it was a serialized item you can locate the serial number and notice the serialized stock is now available in your warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Return from Returns module by Invoice Number&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you have the invoice number the material you are returning is on, you can enter the invoice number on the return and pull the material on the invoice onto the return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Returns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;From Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Select the customer in window that opens&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) On the return, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Return&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) In the window that opens, enter the invoice number&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:EnterInvoiceNumber_CustomerEQReturn.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) The window that opens show the invoice. Double click on it to select&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:REturnByInvoiceNum_SelectInvoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) In the next window, select the material you want to return on that invoice and the material will be added to the return on the Return Items tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReturnItemsTab_MaterialAddedFromInvoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) On the Return Items tab, select the material you want to return and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent Removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and notice the warehouse that the material will be returned into. Change as necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If the material is serialized :&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the serial number in the Receive Stock tab and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If non-serialized item:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Received Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Receive Stock tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CheckPermanentRemoval.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11) If you want to credit the invoice the material was on, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Credit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, otherwise click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to complete the return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:EnterCreditAmount.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12) Enter the amount to be credited in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Credit Amount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. When all items are returned, you can click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to close the order in the window that opens&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14) Go back to the invoice that was credited. If you want the invoice to update the invoice in QB, check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export to QB&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CheckexportToQBOnCreditedInvoice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Return from Returns module search for material&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can initiate a return from the returns module by searching for equipment that has been invoiced for a customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Returns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;From Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Select the customer in window that opens&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select from Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ClickSelectFromCustomerEquipment.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) In the window that opens, select the equipment you want to return. The equipment must be invoiced to be able to return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) In the Enter Items to be returned window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ClickOKInSelectEquipmentWindow.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) Click the the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and the equipment selected will show on the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) Select the item and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11) In the Receive Return Item window, check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent Removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and make sure you are returning into the correct &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;warehouse&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If the material is serialized :&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the serial number in the Receive Stock tab and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;If non-serialized item:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* Enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Received Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Receive Stock tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReceiveReturnItemsWindow_CheckPermRemoval.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the prompt to close the return.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt; I can&amp;#039;t find the item that I need to return &amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
In order to be able to put the equipment on a return it has to be Equipment and it has to have been allocated/reserved and invoiced. If you aren&amp;#039;t seeing it show up in the list of material to add to the return, it is probably not invoiced or not equipment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; do you see the equipment there? If not, it isn&amp;#039;t equipment. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CheckToSeeIfEQ.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If it is showing as equipment, you can open it up and look at it&amp;#039;s Link Status. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:LinkStatusSoldInvoiced.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If it isn&amp;#039;t showing in customer equipment, the item will need to be marked as equipment to return. You can mark the material as equipment by going to the  &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer List&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;  tab &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Look at the non-equipment list or all (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Double click the item you want to return and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Piece&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TurnIntoEquipmentPIece.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Create a credit invoice for customer equipment returned==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Create a Credit Invoice for Material/Equipment Returned&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
The Credit Invoice created in SME will sync to QuickBooks as a Credit Memo. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In this example, I had item VP20W-C on a service order and it was fully invoiced&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:FullyInvoicedMaterialForReturn.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;I can now create a return to bring it back into stock and create a credit invoice that will go over to QuickBooks as a Credit Memo.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Go to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Returns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;From Customer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Choose the customer in the search window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on that tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:NewOnReturnItemsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) In the window that opens, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select from Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) A list of all the equipment at the customer site that has been fully invoiced will show. Select the material&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to add it to the Return Items tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) On the Return Items tab, select/highlight the item you are returning and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) In the Receive Returned Items window, make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent Removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Credit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab (Image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReceiveReturnedItemsCreditTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12) Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Credit Amount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. Enter the pre-tax dollar amount you are crediting.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13) Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create Credit Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the Item will be returned&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab on the return&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;16) Locate the line on the grid for &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Created Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;17) Right click on that line and select&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Jump to Credit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReturnItemDetailsJumpToCredit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;18)  SME will jump to the Invoicing module to the credit invoice (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReturnInvoiceCredit.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--Notice the Invoice type on the invoice is credit &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--Also notice the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export to QuickBooks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; flag is checked. This Credit invoice will sync to QuickBooks as a Credit Memo on your next sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--Below is a screenshot of the Credit Memo in QuickBooks for this example. QuickBooks will pick the next Credit Memo number to assign to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CreditMemoCreatedFromReturn.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Credit the original invoice for the material and set it to sync&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You can credit the original invoice and sync the credited invoice back to QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select from &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer site&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Select customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Return&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:REturn_ActionsCustomerReturn.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Enter the Invoice Number and click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) In the search window that opens, select the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) In the next window, select the equipment to return from the material listed on the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and you will find the equipment listed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) Select the equipment and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:POItems_ReceiveItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) In the Receive Returned Items window, make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Credits&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Return_EnteringTheCreditAmount.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11) Enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;credit amount&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The Credited Invoice # will be populated&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - You must know what you have set on your SMP_Credit Item in QuickBooks so you know if you need to enter the material amount only or the material amount plus tax for the material in the Credit Amount. To check, open QuickBooks. Click Lists &amp;gt; Item List. Open SMP_Credit and note the Tax Code.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMP_Credit_TaxCode.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Receive Returned Items window. The Return will close.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13) Go to the invoice number you credited to see the balance change. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14) Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export to QuickBooks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to update the QB invoice with the credit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CreditedQBInvoice_SMP_CreditItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - if your SMP_Credit item Tax Code is set to TAX, then the SME Invoice balance will retain the tax on the material. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TAxBalanceStillOnSMEInvoiceFormaterialTax.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To clear out the remaining balance for the tax on the SME Invoice, do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Go to the service order with the material you are returning.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Edit the material&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Non-Taxable&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the Material&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Taxes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Uncheck &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lock Taxes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Refresh Tax Rates&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Now the taxes will be cleared out of the SME invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMEInvoiceBalanceZeroAfterMaterialNonTaxable.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Replace Customer Equipment ==&lt;br /&gt;
Returns allow you to return customer equipment and replace with other material in your warehouses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Replacing serialized equipment with another serial number in stock in your warehouses&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1) Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module and search for your customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Right click on Equipment&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Replace&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to jump to new RMA&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) In RMA, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Select the stock and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) In the Receive Return Items window, notice Replace Item is checked. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) In the Select Replacement Part window that opens, locate the part/ serial number you want to use as replacement.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) You will be notified that the item has been reserved for the original order. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:NewREservedItemMessage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) The RMA will close.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11) Go back to Customer Equipment and locate the item on the EQ list. Notice the item you brought back to stock has the equipment status of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Retired&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and another line for the new serial number is entered with a status of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Replacement&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:RetiredAndREplacement.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Replace non-serialized equipment with another from your stock&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1) Go to Customer Equipment module and search for your customer&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Right click on the Equipment&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Replace&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustEQ_ReturnReplace.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to jump to the new RMA&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) On the return, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Select the equipment on the tab and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReturnItemsTab_ClickReceiveItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) In the Receive Return Items window, notice &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Replace Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and that item will be returned to your warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) The Select Replacement Part window opens. Select the stock you want to use as replacement.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) A message will tell you all items have been received. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to close the return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AllItemsReceived_REplacement.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) Go back to customer equipment module to see the original equipment with the status of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Retired&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the new equipment added as &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Replacement&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:NonSerializedReplacementInCustEQ.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Return Material in Inventory back to the Vendor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory module&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Returns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select the Vendor you are returning to in the Search window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. In the return, select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReturnItemsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select From Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Enter Items to be returned&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Select the material you are returning in the Select Inventory Item window. If it is serialized, write down the serial number because you have to enter it later.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. Make sure the quantity is correct and Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the return. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReceiveItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11. In the Receive Return Items window, check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent Removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*        If serialized item: enter the serial number in the Receive Stock tab and click Add. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*        If non-serialized item, enter the Received Quantity in the Receive Stock tab. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12. You will be prompted with “all items have been received, close return? Click the order?”  Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Bring material back into inventory from Vendor&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If your vendor sends you back the material you removed from inventory, you can re-add the material to inventory. On the PO Items tab, right click on the material that was sent back. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendor Return&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (image below). The material will be added to your stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:VendorReturn_POItemsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Returning serialized item from customer to vendor and swapping with a new serial number ==&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1: Return Serial Number from Customer Equipment back to your stock&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Step 2: Return serial number from your stock to vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Step 3: Create PO to vendor to bring another serial number back to stock&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Step 4: Create a service order to put the new serial number back at the customer site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Step 1: Return Serial Number from Customer Equipment back to your stock&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You can follow steps to return serialized equipment from customer stock as described previously on this page where you can see multiple options, or follow steps below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Go to Customer Equipment&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Right click on the Equipment&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Remove/Retire&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to jump to new RMA&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) In RMA, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Select the item on the grid and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) In the Receive Return Items window make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent Removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) The RMA will close.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) Go to the Customer Equipment and notice the status of the equipment you returned is now Retired.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) Go to the inventor item, click the Material Details tab. Locate the serial number and notice the serialized stock is now available in your warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Step 2: Return serial number from your stock to vendor&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1) In RMA, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To Vendor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Select the Vendor&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Return Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) In the Enter Items to be Returned window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select from Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) In the Select inventory item window, select the material you need to return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) In the next window that opens, select the serial number for the stock you need to return.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) On the Return Items tab, select the stock on the grid and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) In the Receive Returned Items window, check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Permanent Removal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) The RMA will close. The serialized material is out of your stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Step 3: Create PO to vendor to bring another serial number back to stock&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1) Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Purchase Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the vendor.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PO Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;I&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button and select the inventory item you need to bring into stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ClickTheIButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) Make sure the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; are correct.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) On the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PO Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, select the material on the grid and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) In the Receive PO Items window, enter the serial number in field circled below. Click Add to the right of the field and click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PO_EnterSerialNumberREceived.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) The PO will close and the serialized stock is in your warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Step 4: Create a service order to put the new serial number back at the customer site.&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1) Create a new service order for the customer that needs the new serial number.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) On the Order Items tab, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Material&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Select the material&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) In the Add Items to Order window, make sure the price is correct. Make sure A&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;dd to Customer Equipment&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Stock Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) Select the serial number you want to reserve.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Items to Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; the Service Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Close Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; the order. The serial number is taken out of your stock and you will see it on the customer’s equipment list.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Print the Return ==&lt;br /&gt;
1. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print/Email&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:printticket.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select Standard Return Ticket by Ship From.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click the printer icon in the print preview window to print the ticket.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Merge_Database&amp;diff=5536</id>
		<title>Merge Database</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Merge_Database&amp;diff=5536"/>
		<updated>2014-10-14T22:45:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;&amp;lt;b&amp;gt;Title:  SME Merge Databases      &amp;lt;/b&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;Subject:  Instructions of how to Merge SME databases.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;SME has the capability to merge databases.  For example&lt;br /&gt;
if you have database on an outside server that needs to merge into an inside&lt;br /&gt;
server, the SME merge capability will manage this.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;Please note that lots of data is transferring for merge&lt;br /&gt;
functionality and it’s not reversible or undo-able. It’s critical to have&lt;br /&gt;
backups of both databases prior to doing the merge.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;For&lt;br /&gt;
purposes of this instructions we will consider an Outside database called&lt;br /&gt;
OutsideDB that will be merged into an Inside database called InsideDB.  Your&lt;br /&gt;
database names will be different.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;Below&lt;br /&gt;
is an example of merging OutsideDB into InsideDB.  All new customers from the&lt;br /&gt;
outside are copied into the inside.  All matching customers from Outside and&lt;br /&gt;
Inside are not touched.  Any customers in Inside database only database are not&lt;br /&gt;
touched.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;Summary of steps:  You need to get the OutsideDB attached&lt;br /&gt;
to the SQL Server that the InsideDB is running on.  Once you attach the&lt;br /&gt;
OutsideDB to the Inside SQL Server, then it is ready for the merge.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing&amp;gt;Steps:&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;1.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Note:&lt;br /&gt;
Be sure to have backups, especially of the InsideDB.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;2.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;From&lt;br /&gt;
the outside SQL Server, get a copy of the database files.  There are two ways&lt;br /&gt;
to do this: either make a backup or detach the database from the Outside SQL&lt;br /&gt;
Server make copies and then reattach.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:1.0in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;a.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Option&lt;br /&gt;
1, Backup method:  From SQL Management Studio on the Outside SQL Sever, select&lt;br /&gt;
the OutsideDB, right click and select backup.  Select the location to save the&lt;br /&gt;
backup.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:1.0in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;b.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Option&lt;br /&gt;
2, Detach method:  From SQL Management Studio on the Outside SQL Server, select&lt;br /&gt;
OutsideDB and right click and select detach and follow the instructions to&lt;br /&gt;
detach.  Then make copies of the OutsideDB.mdf and OutsideDB_log.ldf files.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;3.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Copy&lt;br /&gt;
the files created from step 2 to the Inside server.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;4.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;From&lt;br /&gt;
the inside SQL Server, run SQL Management studio so you can attach OutsideDB to&lt;br /&gt;
this SQL Server instance.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:1.0in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;a.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Option1,&lt;br /&gt;
Backup method from step 2: Right click on the database and select Restore. &lt;br /&gt;
Select the backup file from step 3 to restore and follow the instructions.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:1.0in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;b.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Option&lt;br /&gt;
2, Detach method from step 2:  Right click on the database and select Attach. &lt;br /&gt;
Select the files copied from step 3 and follow the instructions.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;5.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;You&lt;br /&gt;
are now ready to merge.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;6.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Run&lt;br /&gt;
SME on the Inside server.  Select InsideDB.  It’s important to run SME on the&lt;br /&gt;
database that is going to be merged into.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;7.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Select&lt;br /&gt;
Utilities&amp;amp;gt;Utilities&amp;amp;gt;Import Data&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;8.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Select&lt;br /&gt;
Merge from Database and select run it.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;9.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Select&lt;br /&gt;
OutsideDB and select Ok to start the merge.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:.5in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;10.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;When the merge is&lt;br /&gt;
completed, you can detach the OutsideDB from the inside sql server as follows:&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=MsoNoSpacing style=&amp;#039;margin-left:1.0in;text-indent:-.25in&amp;#039;&amp;gt;a.&amp;lt;span&lt;br /&gt;
style=&amp;#039;font:7.0pt &amp;quot;Times New Roman&amp;quot;&amp;#039;&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;amp;nbsp; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;Within&lt;br /&gt;
SQL Management Studio, right click on the OutsideDB and select detach and&lt;br /&gt;
follow the instructions.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Report_Builder_Tutorial&amp;diff=5514</id>
		<title>Report Builder Tutorial</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Report_Builder_Tutorial&amp;diff=5514"/>
		<updated>2014-09-30T21:16:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;SME uses a tool called Report Builder to customize the report/document forms.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The tutorial, available from the following link will familiarize you with the necessary steps required to create, modify, or customize existing reports however it cannot be attached to your SMP data.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;&amp;amp;nbsp;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;&amp;quot;http://www.digital-metaphors.com/download/learning_reportbuilder.html&amp;quot;&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;&amp;lt;span&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customizing Reports with Report Builder&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial assumes that you are modifying an existing report, where the settings under Customize Report are correctly set. If you wish to modify those details, read Customizing Reports.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To access the Report Builder, go to Customize Reports under the Reports tab in SME and click the Open Report Designer button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Adding New Text Fields&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In this tutorial, the Standard Purchase Order report will have phone, fax, and due date fields added to it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 1: making room for the new fields. Phone and fax information are only listed once per page, so they belong in the Header or Group Header. Drag the Group Header down to free up space. To move the headings for the details down, drag a box around them and drag them down to be right above the Group Header ribbon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 2: adding new non-repeating fields. Phone and fax information can be found under the Customer table, in the Data Tree on the right side of the screen. Select the Customer table, then the Phone and Fax fields, and drag them onto an empty spot on the report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Step 3: adding repeating fields. Because Due Dates show up on every item, that field belongs in the Detail tab. In this report, the details are in a SubReport. Click on the tabs on the bottom of the screen to move between the main report and subreports. The DueDate field is in the PurchaseOrders table, so select it then drag DueDate to where you want it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once you&amp;#039;re finished arranging the text fields, save the report and make sure the Filename is specified as the new report file in the Details and Settings section of Customize Report.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Formatting: Page Breaks&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This tutorial is useful for if you only want to print one item or one customer per page, and the report is not set to page break on a change in that field. Placing a field in either the header or group header space will result in only one value being displayed. Placing the field in the details space will display all values in the table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To print one main field (customer, item, location, etc) per page:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#    Move the field you want to page break on to the Group Header. Right-click the Group Header ribbon and select Groups, or go to Report tab and click Groups.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Change Break On to the data field you want to page break on.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Check “Start new page” under On Group Change.&lt;br /&gt;
#    Click Ok.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Material_Allocation&amp;diff=5500</id>
		<title>Material Allocation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Material_Allocation&amp;diff=5500"/>
		<updated>2014-09-11T15:32:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: /* How to Deliver Partial Quantities of an Item */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;hHbpqIE_2k0&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When adding material to a service or install order, you must make sure stock is reserved from your inventory to keep your inventory levels accurate.  You can reserve stock using the Material Allocation window shown below.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MaterialAllocationWindow.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;The Material Allocation window can be access a few different ways:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Allocate material for a particular order (in Service or Install order, click Actions &amp;gt; Inventory Allocation)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       For a specific inventory item, see all orders item is on and allocate (In Inventory item, click Actions &amp;gt; Inventory Allocation)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Allocate all material on all orders in SME (Tools &amp;gt; Inventory Allocation)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default Warehouse ==&lt;br /&gt;
The default warehouse is either the warehouse called &amp;quot;default&amp;quot; or another warehouse you assigned as default. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SetDefaultWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When you are adding stock to your inventory, you select which warehouse you are adding the stock to as showing in the Receive PO Items screenshot below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:REceivingIntoWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Item Status ==&lt;br /&gt;
When adding material to the order, there are three basic scenarios.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Stock is available in your default warehouse &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Stock is available, but not in your default warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Stock is not available and you need to place a purchase order for the item&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Each material on an order has an Item Status. The Item Status will tell you if the stock is available and has been allocated to the order, if stock has been reserved for the order or if no stock is available for the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To see the Item Status on an order:&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to the Service or Install Order.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Allocation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Material Allocation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window, locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column (circled in screenshot below)&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MaterialAllocation_ItemStatus.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Below are the Item Status values you will find for the three basic scenarios for serialized and non-serialized items.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Before closing an order, you need to make sure the item status is &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reserved&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: -moz-use-text-color; border-collapse: collapse&amp;quot; border=&amp;quot;1&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt; border-style: solid; border-color: windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 108.9pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;145&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 121.5pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;162&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;2pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Stock Available in the default warehouse&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 128.7pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;172&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;2pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Stock Available, but not in the default warehouse&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 119.7pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;160&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;   &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;2pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;No stock available&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 108.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;145&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;2pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Serialized Item&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;    &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 121.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;162&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Status = &amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;rgb(227, 108, 10)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Allocated&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;    &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In Material Allocation window, click [[Image:Select.jpg]]   to select specific serial number.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;   &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Once serial number selected, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Status = &amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;rgb(227, 108, 10)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Reserved&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 128.7pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;172&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Status = &amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;rgb(227, 108, 10)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Has JIT Items&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;   &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In Material Allocation window, click   [[Image:Select.jpg]]      to select specific serial number in the warehouse you want to use.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;    &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Once serial number selected,&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Link Status = &amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;rgb(227, 108, 10)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Reserved&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;   &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 119.7pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;160&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Status = &amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;rgb(227, 108, 10)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Has JIT Items&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;   &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Must click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create PO for JIT-Only Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;   &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Once PO items received, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Status = &amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;rgb(227, 108, 10)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Reserved&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: none solid solid; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 108.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;145&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;2pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Non Serialized Item&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 121.5pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;162&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Status = &amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;rgb(227, 108, 10)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Allocated&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;   &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In Material Allocation window, click   [[Image:Select.jpg]]   to select the stock you want to use.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;   &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Status = &amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;rgb(227, 108, 10)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Reserved&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;   &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 128.7pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;172&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Status = &amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;rgb(227, 108, 10)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Has JIT Items&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;   &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;In Material Allocation window, click   [[Image:Select.jpg]]   to select stock in the warehouse you want to use.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;   &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Status = &amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;rgb(227, 108, 10)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Reserved&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;   &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: none solid solid none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 119.7pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;160&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Status = &amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;rgb(227, 108, 10)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Has JIT Items&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;   &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Must click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create PO for JIT-Only Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;   &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Once PO items received, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Link Status = &amp;lt;font color=&amp;quot;rgb(227, 108, 10)&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Reserved&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;   &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;*&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; If you want to skip the step of manually reserving non-serialized stock that is available in your warehouse, you can leave the link status as &amp;quot;Allocated&amp;quot;. If you have SME setup to auto deliver allocated stock on close, then when you close the order the allocated stock will be taken out of your stock.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you choose to do this, your items left as &amp;quot;Allocated&amp;quot; will not change your Available number. Instead, you will need to look at the &amp;quot;unallocated&amp;quot; number to see how much stock has not been allocated yet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To setup SME to auto deliver allocated on close, go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Auto Deliver Allocated on Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AutoDeliverAllocatedOnClose.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reserve Stock for Material on an Order ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.       Go to the Service or Install Order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Allocation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click [[File:Select.jpg]] in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select Inventory Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window opens (image below). Here you can select the items you want to reserve for the order. &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If it is a serialized item, you will see a list of all serial numbers. Also, see which warehouse the stock is in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SelectInventoryItems.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; 5.       Double click on the material to reserve on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Once stock is selected, notice the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; changes to Reserved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reserved.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: -moz-use-text-color; border-collapse: collapse&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 81.9pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 396.9pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;529&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Next Steps&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 81.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Has JIT Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 396.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;529&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click [[Image:Select.jpg]] to select stock.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;If no stock available, close the Material Allocation window and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create PO for JIt-Only Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the order.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 81.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Allocated&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 396.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;529&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click [[Image:Select.jpg]] to select stock.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 81.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reserved&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 396.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;529&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Don’t need to do anything, stock is already reserved.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reserve Stock for All Material on All Orders ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tools&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Allocate Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to allocate material on all open orders in SME. Accessing the Material Allocation window this way provides a quick way to see what inventory is needed across all orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:InventoryAllocationALL.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Material Allocation window that opens, locate the Item Status column.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: -moz-use-text-color; border-collapse: collapse&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt medium 1pt 1pt; border-style: solid none solid solid; border-color: windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240) windowtext windowtext; padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 81.9pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Status&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: 1pt 1pt 1pt medium; border-style: solid solid solid none; border-color: windowtext windowtext windowtext rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; width: 396.9pt; background: none repeat scroll 0% 0% rgb(217, 217, 217)&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;529&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Next Steps&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 81.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Has JIT Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 396.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;529&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click  [[Image:Select.jpg]] to select stock.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;If no stock available, close the Material Allocation window and place a purchase order. &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 81.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Allocated&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 396.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;529&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Click [[Image:Select.jpg]]  to select stock.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 81.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;109&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reserved&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 396.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;529&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Don’t need to do anything, stock is already reserved.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reserve Stock for a Specific Inventory Item ==&lt;br /&gt;
Go to an inventory item and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Allocation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Accessing the Material Allocation window this way provides a way to see all orders the inventory item is on. Here you can reserve stock for this particular item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MaterialAllocation_InventoryItems.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Setup the Material Allocation Window ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[File:Columns.jpg]] in the upper left corner to rearrange the order of the columns or remove columns from the Material Allocation window.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
Click on the column title and drag up and down the list. As you drag the title, green arrows will appear. Drop in the location you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ArrangeColumns.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How to Deliver Partial Quantities of an Item ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have an item allocated for a service order with quantity of 100 but need to deliver 50 today and 50 at a later date, then you will need to split the material out onto two different line items on the Material Allocation window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Here is a sample of all 100 on one line and all allocated:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:OneLineItemQ100.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Close the Material Allocation window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab on the order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Open the Inventory Item&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Stock Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab in Add Items to Order window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ClickStockDetailTabMaterial.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the lower left corner of Add Items to Order window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ClickDeleteStockDetailsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) At the top, enter 50 in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Select Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:EnterQuantity50AndSelectSTock.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) In the window that opens, double click on the stock lot to reserve 50&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8) Go back to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab and change quantity from 50 back to 100&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ChangeQtyfrom50to100.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9) Back on the Stock Details tab, you will see the 100 items broken out into two details ( 50 &amp;amp; 50)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TwoLinesForQuantityof100.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10) When you open the Inventory Allocation window, you will see the 100 broken out into two lines (50 &amp;amp; 50). You can change the line you want to delivered.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MaterialAllocationWindow_TwoBrokenOutQuantities.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Proposals&amp;diff=5495</id>
		<title>Proposals</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Proposals&amp;diff=5495"/>
		<updated>2014-09-03T15:11:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: /* Creating Proposals */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;You can create proposals for leads or for existing customers. When you are ready, you can convert the proposal to a service order, install order, or invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creating Proposals ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before you create a proposal, you have to either create a lead or a customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to the Sales module &amp;gt; Proposals&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select either From Customer or From Sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
￼&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_New.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. The Search window will open. Select the customer or the sales lead you want to create the proposal for. Once the customer or lead is selected, the proposal is created as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services Proposed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. On the left side under &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service Requested&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, type a description of your proposal. This text will show on the Standard Order Item Proposal as shown in the image below. You can always create [[Common Services]] if you type the same text frequently on the Services Requested tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_ProposedServices.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. This is where you will add material and service items to the proposal. The items will be listed on the proposal as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_ItemsShowingOnProposal.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding Services to Proposal&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the Order Items tab, click Add Service.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. In the search window, double click the service item you want to add to the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Price&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; fields will show on the Standard Order Item Proposal report as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_ServiceItemOnReport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click OK to add the service item to the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding Material to Proposal&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the Order ITems tab, click Add Material.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. In the search window, double click on the material you want to add to the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Price&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; fields will show on the Standard Order Item Proposal repor as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_MAterialOnServiceReport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click OK to add the material to the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Totals Tab to View Profit&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Totals&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab to view your profit on the proposal. It shows the amount quoted, your cost which comes from the cost field on the items, and the profit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_TotalsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Organizing items using Text Items.&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TextItemUsedAsParent.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Text&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. In the Order Detail Editor window, locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field and enter a description for the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Now when entering items to be grouped under that text line, select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Parent Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Add Item to Order window&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You can also add a text line to subtotal the items contained under a parent.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Text&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. In the Order Detail Editor window, select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SubTotal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the top&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Enter a &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Choose the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Parent Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; you want to subtotal&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderItems_TextGrouping.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fixed Rate Proposal ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your proposal to a Fixed Rate Proposal by selecting &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Fixed - Fixed Total&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Convert Type field on the Details and Settings tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you enter a fixed amount for material, labor, or services on the order, then that is the amount that will show on the proposal. It won&amp;#039;t matter how many items to add to the proposal or the price on all of the items, SME will use the fixed rate amounts on the proposal. When you convert the proposal to an invoice, it will use the fixed rates on the invoice and not all the prices on the items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposals_FixedRatesTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The image below shows the tab filled out. The first image shows when you enter a Markup %, the Fixed Amount is calculated. The second image shows that you don&amp;#039;t have to enter a markup %, but you can also enter an amount directly into the Fixed Amount column.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_FixedRatesTab_FilledOut.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When you view the Standard Order Item Proposal, you will see the totals section pulls the price from the Fixed Rates tab, not from the items on the order as shown on the image below. You may want to remove the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;total&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column from the line item section which was done in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_FixedRateOnProposal.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pay attention to what items you select in the Item fields because they will drive if the material, labor or service fixed totals are taxed or not. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:FixedAmountItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When proposal is converted to an order then to an invoice, the invoice will go to QuickBooks.  The income for the fixed Labor, Material and Services amounts will pass through the items selected in the Item field on each fixed amount in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Commission on Proposal ==&lt;br /&gt;
SME has a couple ways to calculate commission. One way is a straight commission based on the proposal total or the proposal profit. Another way SME can calculate commission is by using Price Books which allows you to assign a different commission percentage for every item in inventory and every item in services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Setting up Straight Percent Commission&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Search for salesperson in Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Is Salesperson&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked on the Details and Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Enter the commission percentage in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Commission Rate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. You can choose if you want the commission to be calculated based on the proposal total or the proposal profit. To set SME to calculate commission based on the proposal profit, go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;System&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Calculate Commission Based on Profit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;View Commission on Proposal&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Create a proposal and add items to the proposal. SME will calculate the commission and you can view it on the Details and Settings tab. You will also see the commission on the Totals tab in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales % Commission&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_StraightCommission.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Commissions based on Price Books&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If the commission rate depends on what your sales team is selling, then you may want to use commission based on Price Books. With this method you can create a Price Book you will assign to the proposal. The price book defines the commission rates which can vary depending on what is on the proposal. Material may receive 10% commission, some service items may receive 8% commission, etc. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Commissions by Items]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to read more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Approving Proposals ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to require proposals to be approved before it can be closed or converted to an order, do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to Setup module &amp;gt; Company &amp;gt; System.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Require Proposal Approval to Close or Convert to Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Then you will need to make sure the SME user that will be approving proposals has the permission to approve proposals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. In the Setup module, go to the User Group section.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Search for the user group the SME user that will be approving is in.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click the Administrative Clearances tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Proposal Administrator&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Financial Data Access section.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - After a proposal is approved, the taxes get locked on the proposal and the order that is generated has the taxes locked. If you are going to change the service order items and you need the taxes to be recalculated, make sure you are unchecking the &amp;quot;lock tax&amp;quot; box on the service order taxes tab. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Lock Taxes]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To approve a proposal, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Approve Proposal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_Approved.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Searching Proposals ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Search button to search open, approved, or al proposals. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposals_Search.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the search window you can choose the columns you are viewing, rearrange the order of the columns, sort the columns, and filter by typing in the filter box under the column header. For more information on the search window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Search Window]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposals_SearchWindow.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exporting Proposal List to Excel ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export your proposal search window to Excel. Use the Excel tools to sort, filter, and graph your proposals. In the search window click Export &amp;gt; Export to Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_ExportToExcel.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Converting Proposal to a Service Order, Install Order, or Invoice==&lt;br /&gt;
You can convert the proposal to a service order, install order, an invoice, or a recurring order. Once the proposal is converted, the status will change to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Closed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposals_Convert.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default Salesperson ==&lt;br /&gt;
In a customer record you can assign a salesperson. When a proposal is created, if the user creating the proposal is a salesperson then their name will be used for the salesperson on the proposal. If the user creating the proposal is not a salesperson, then the salesperson will populate with the salesperson assigned on the customer record.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Proposals&amp;diff=5494</id>
		<title>Proposals</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Proposals&amp;diff=5494"/>
		<updated>2014-09-03T15:09:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: /* Creating Proposals */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;You can create proposals for leads or for existing customers. When you are ready, you can convert the proposal to a service order, install order, or invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creating Proposals ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before you create a proposal, you have to either create a lead or a customer. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to the Sales module &amp;gt; Proposals&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select either From Customer or From Sales&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
￼&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_New.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. The Search window will open. Select the customer or the sales lead you want to create the proposal for. Once the customer or lead is selected, the proposal is created as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services Proposed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. On the left side under &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service Requested&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, type a description of your proposal. This text will show on the Standard Order Item Proposal as shown in the image below. You can always create [[Common Services]] if you type the same text frequently on the Services Requested tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_ProposedServices.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. This is where you will add material and service items to the proposal. The items will be listed on the proposal as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_ItemsShowingOnProposal.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding Services to Proposal&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the Order Items tab, click Add Service.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. In the search window, double click the service item you want to add to the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Service Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Price&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; fields will show on the Standard Order Item Proposal report as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_ServiceItemOnReport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click OK to add the service item to the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding Material to Proposal&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. On the Order ITems tab, click Add Material.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. In the search window, double click on the material you want to add to the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Description&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Price&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; fields will show on the Standard Order Item Proposal repor as shown below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_MAterialOnServiceReport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click OK to add the material to the proposal.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Totals Tab to View Profit&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Totals&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab to view your profit on the proposal. It shows the amount quoted, your cost which comes from the cost field on the items, and the profit.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_TotalsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Fixed Rate Proposal ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can change your proposal to a Fixed Rate Proposal by selecting &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Fixed - Fixed Total&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Convert Type field on the Details and Settings tab. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you enter a fixed amount for material, labor, or services on the order, then that is the amount that will show on the proposal. It won&amp;#039;t matter how many items to add to the proposal or the price on all of the items, SME will use the fixed rate amounts on the proposal. When you convert the proposal to an invoice, it will use the fixed rates on the invoice and not all the prices on the items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposals_FixedRatesTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The image below shows the tab filled out. The first image shows when you enter a Markup %, the Fixed Amount is calculated. The second image shows that you don&amp;#039;t have to enter a markup %, but you can also enter an amount directly into the Fixed Amount column.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_FixedRatesTab_FilledOut.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When you view the Standard Order Item Proposal, you will see the totals section pulls the price from the Fixed Rates tab, not from the items on the order as shown on the image below. You may want to remove the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;total&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column from the line item section which was done in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_FixedRateOnProposal.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Pay attention to what items you select in the Item fields because they will drive if the material, labor or service fixed totals are taxed or not. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:FixedAmountItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;When proposal is converted to an order then to an invoice, the invoice will go to QuickBooks.  The income for the fixed Labor, Material and Services amounts will pass through the items selected in the Item field on each fixed amount in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Commission on Proposal ==&lt;br /&gt;
SME has a couple ways to calculate commission. One way is a straight commission based on the proposal total or the proposal profit. Another way SME can calculate commission is by using Price Books which allows you to assign a different commission percentage for every item in inventory and every item in services.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Setting up Straight Percent Commission&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Search for salesperson in Users.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Is Salesperson&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked on the Details and Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Enter the commission percentage in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Commission Rate&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. You can choose if you want the commission to be calculated based on the proposal total or the proposal profit. To set SME to calculate commission based on the proposal profit, go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;System&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Calculate Commission Based on Profit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;View Commission on Proposal&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Create a proposal and add items to the proposal. SME will calculate the commission and you can view it on the Details and Settings tab. You will also see the commission on the Totals tab in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales % Commission&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_StraightCommission.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Commissions based on Price Books&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If the commission rate depends on what your sales team is selling, then you may want to use commission based on Price Books. With this method you can create a Price Book you will assign to the proposal. The price book defines the commission rates which can vary depending on what is on the proposal. Material may receive 10% commission, some service items may receive 8% commission, etc. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Commissions by Items]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to read more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Approving Proposals ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to require proposals to be approved before it can be closed or converted to an order, do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to Setup module &amp;gt; Company &amp;gt; System.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Require Proposal Approval to Close or Convert to Order&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Then you will need to make sure the SME user that will be approving proposals has the permission to approve proposals.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. In the Setup module, go to the User Group section.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Search for the user group the SME user that will be approving is in.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click the Administrative Clearances tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Proposal Administrator&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Financial Data Access section.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - After a proposal is approved, the taxes get locked on the proposal and the order that is generated has the taxes locked. If you are going to change the service order items and you need the taxes to be recalculated, make sure you are unchecking the &amp;quot;lock tax&amp;quot; box on the service order taxes tab. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Lock Taxes]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To approve a proposal, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Approve Proposal&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_Approved.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Searching Proposals ==&lt;br /&gt;
Use the Search button to search open, approved, or al proposals. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposals_Search.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the search window you can choose the columns you are viewing, rearrange the order of the columns, sort the columns, and filter by typing in the filter box under the column header. For more information on the search window, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;[[Search Window]]&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposals_SearchWindow.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Exporting Proposal List to Excel ==&lt;br /&gt;
You can export your proposal search window to Excel. Use the Excel tools to sort, filter, and graph your proposals. In the search window click Export &amp;gt; Export to Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposal_ExportToExcel.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Converting Proposal to a Service Order, Install Order, or Invoice==&lt;br /&gt;
You can convert the proposal to a service order, install order, an invoice, or a recurring order. Once the proposal is converted, the status will change to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Closed&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Proposals_Convert.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default Salesperson ==&lt;br /&gt;
In a customer record you can assign a salesperson. When a proposal is created, if the user creating the proposal is a salesperson then their name will be used for the salesperson on the proposal. If the user creating the proposal is not a salesperson, then the salesperson will populate with the salesperson assigned on the customer record.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Dispatch_Guide&amp;diff=5487</id>
		<title>Dispatch Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Dispatch_Guide&amp;diff=5487"/>
		<updated>2014-08-28T22:49:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: /* Dispatch FAQ - Orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Dispatch Window allows you to schedule your technicians for work orders and view your technicians schedule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch the video below or continue reading below to get an orientation of dispatch, learn how to schedule orders on your techs schedule, and how to customize your dispatch layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;j546EsXlC2Q&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch Overview&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Dispatch window allows you to see your technician&amp;#039;s schedule and schedule orders on your tech&amp;#039;s calendar. To open the Dispatch window, click Dispatch in the Main Form Elements tab (circled below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MainFormElements_Dispatch.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Dispatch window is separated into different sections. See below for an orientation of the sections:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DispatchSections.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: -moz-use-text-color; border-collapse: collapse&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 45.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;61&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;26pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 432.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;577&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Calendar &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Select the day of the month you would like to see on the dispatch window.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Techs &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Shows your technicians. This view is used to drag techs onto the Order Planner tab&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vehicles &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Use this tab to drag your company’s vehicles onto the Order Planner tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 45.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;61&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;26pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 432.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;577&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Today’s Labor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – A list view of all labor scheduled for the day selected on the calendar.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Day Planner&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Displays each technician’s schedule for the day selected on the calendar. Move orders between technicians and expand/shrink order’s labor hours.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Week Planner&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – View the orders scheduled for technicians starting with the date selected on the calendar. Drag orders between techs and days.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Planner&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – View your open orders and drag technicians onto the orders. View by day, week, 2 weeks and month.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech ToDo List&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Create a list of to do’s for your techs. This is separate from the Activities window in SME.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unavailable Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Enter unavailable time for your technician. Prevent you from scheduling techs when they aren’t available.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 45.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;61&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;26pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 432.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;577&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unscheduled &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Shows all open orders that do not have labor scheduled yet. Drag and drop onto the dispatch calendar.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Proposals&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Shows all open proposals if Proposals is checked on the Settings tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Shows all open service orders if Service is checked on the Settings tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Install &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Shows all install orders if Install is checked on the Settings tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Shows all invoices if Invoice is checked on the Settings tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Use this tab to select what you are seeing on the Dispatch section. Filter your dispatch calendar by technician workgroups. Filter the orders that display on service, install and unscheduled by Zone If you have both Service and Install checked, the Day Planner tab will show you all service and install work scheduled on your tech’s schedule. If only Service is checked, you will only see service orders on your tech’s schedule.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Tabs ==&lt;br /&gt;
The tabs at the bottom of dipsatch show you open service orders, open install orders, open invoices, open proposals, as well as unscheduled orders (orders that don&amp;#039;t have a tech scheduled yet). Drag orders from the tabs on to the dispatch calendar to schedule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Orders won&amp;#039;t show on these tabs if the order status assigned to the order don&amp;#039;t have &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show On Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; checked. Go to setup &amp;gt; Company &amp;gt; Lists &amp;gt; Order Statuses. Edit the statuses to uncheck the Show on Dispatch option if you would like to reduce down the orders that show on these tabs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderTabs.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From these tabs, you can sort and filter your orders. Drag and drop the order onto the dispatch calendar to schedule your tech. On the Proposals, Service, Install and Invoices tab you can choose which columns you are viewing. For example, you may want to be able to sort your service orders by order status, due date, or order number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Choose columns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The views that you create in the Service &amp;amp; Install module &amp;gt; Services can be applied to the service tab in dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Right click on the column header.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Apply View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Select the search view. These search views listed are created in the Service Order Search window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ApplyView.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rearrange the order of the columns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can drag and drop columns in place:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DragColumns.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also click [[File:ColumnMgmt.jpg]] to rearrange columns and remove columns from the grid:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click [[File:ColumnMgmt.jpg]] in the upper left corner of the Service tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ColumnMgmtLarge.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       The columns will display in a list.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click on a column and drag it to the position you want in the list. Green arrows will indicate where you are dropping the column.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Uncheck any column to remove it from the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ColumnMgmtDisplay.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To learn more about setting up search views in SME, watch the searching tips video.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Filtering orders on tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to filtering your search views, click and type what you want to filter for below the column header as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FilterGrid.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering % after the word (e.g. tire%) you type will find everything in the column that begins with the word you typed.&lt;br /&gt;
Enter % before the word (e.g. %tire) you type will find the word anywhere in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scheduling Orders on Dispatch ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag an order from the tabs at the bottom of dispatch and drop it on the dispatch board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*NOTE* When you drag an order onto a tech’s schedule, a labor item is added to the order. Go to the service or install order, select the labor tab and notice the new labor item added.&lt;br /&gt;
To expand the hours scheduled on your tech’s calendar, click on the order scheduled, click on the bottom of the order (image below) and drag the order down the calendar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DragOnDispatch.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag the order from one technician’s schedule and drop on another tech’s schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rescheduling order on tech’s schedule to another day&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       On &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Day Planner&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select the order on your tech’s schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reschedule Labor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the window that opens, select the new date and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Order has been moved to your tech’s schedule on date selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reschedule.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Jump to order from dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double click on an order scheduled on your techs calendar and SME will jump to the order. This is an easy way to update all of the orders at the end of the day. From dispatch, jump to the orders that were scheduled for the day, update the order status and make other changes to the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Link between Dispatch and the Labor Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you add an order to your technician’s calendar in dispatch, a labor line item is added to the Labor tab on the order. It works the other way as well. In an order, if you go to the Labor tab and add new labor, the order is added to your tech’s calendar on dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Link.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Quick Schedule ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a service or install order, you can use Quick Schedule to quickly schedule a technician on dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QuickScheduleButton.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#       On the Details and Settings tab, click [[File:Q.jpg]].&lt;br /&gt;
#       The Labor Editor window will open. The Labor Editor access through the [[File:Q.jpg]]  button is a scaled down window and provides basic scheduling fields.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QuickScheduleLaborEditor.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Scheduled Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Start Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Scheduled Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the technician will be scheduled on dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dispatch Layouts ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dispatch there may be tabs you don’t use, such as the vehicles tab, technician’s tab, invoices tab and proposals tab. You can setup different layouts in SME showing you the tabs you want to see and switch between the layouts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;First it is a good idea to save the original layout in dispatch:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click [[File:SaveLayout.jpg]] next to the Layout field (image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SaveLayoutLg.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Layouts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New layout name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field, enter a name for the original layout. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SaveLayoutName.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the original layout is saved, you can create other layouts and always change back to the original layout using the Layouts dropdown.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LayoutDropdown.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Create another layout:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can close the tabs you don’t want to see in dispatch and save that view.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click the [[File:x.jpg]] in any of the tabs to remove the tabs from dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click  next to the Layout field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Layouts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New layout name field&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, enter a name for the original layout. Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To switch between saved layouts, use the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Layout&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field to select the layout you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Example of changing a simple part of dispatch layout&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A simple change that helps dispatch usability it to move the unscheduled tab from below the grid to above the grid as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:UnscheduledTabsOnTop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Right click on the Unscheduled tab and choose Top (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:RightClickOnUnscheduledTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Now you&amp;#039;ll need to save the layout. Click the second button to the right of the layouts drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AssignNewLayoutName.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. In the window that opens, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Enter a name for your view. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in Docking Setup window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Now it should have that view selected in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Layout&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; drop down and will be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;How to go back to original layout&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If your Dispatch layout has been altered and you wish to restore to the default layout please do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. In SME click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Help&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech Support Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Enter &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;833&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Delete the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Double click the folder with your user name.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Delete the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; folder in that folder as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Open the dispatch window in SME to see the original layout restored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding New Technicians ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you &amp;#039;&amp;#039;aren&amp;#039;t&amp;#039;&amp;#039; syncing timesheets, then you can simply add a new Technician by adding a user in SME and checking &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Is Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Either search for the user that needs to be a tech or create a new user&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Check the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Is Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; checkbox. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AddANewTech.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. On the Technician Settings tab, you will probably want to select a &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;default service item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for the technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Entering a new user in SME does not sync over to QuickBooks as an employee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you are syncing TechTime (SME Labor to QuickBooks timesheet entry), you must first enter the technician as an employee in QuickBooks and sync them to SME. They will show as an SME User and you will have to check&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Is Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in their user record. (&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;About TechTime syncing: http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink#Tech_Time_.28syncing_time_sheets_to_QB.29&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;You must log in to QuickBooks as the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Administrator&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;in &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Single User Mode&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;to export new employee&amp;#039;s from QuickBooks to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; . This is a QuickBooks requirement. If a sync has been processed, and QuickBooks is not logged in with a user that has employee editing permissions, you will need to do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*    Log in to QB as Admin or a user with employee editing permissions&lt;br /&gt;
*    Edit the employee in QB to reset the ‘is modified’ flag (i.e. add a period to the address)&lt;br /&gt;
*    Put QB in Single User mode&lt;br /&gt;
*    Run a sync&lt;br /&gt;
*    Return QB to multi-user mode&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When filling out a new employee in QuickBooks, make sure you fill out their &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;state&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If you do not, QuickBooks will enter &amp;quot;none&amp;quot; in their state which goes to SME as the state of &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;. If the employee is edited in SME, QuickBooks will reject the employee on export because it doesn&amp;#039;t recognize the state of &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Editing a user in SME doesn&amp;#039;t update the employee in QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Editing an employee in QuickBooks does update the user in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Entering a new user in SME does not sync over to QuickBooks as an employee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Remove Users from Dispatch Window ==&lt;br /&gt;
When you open the Dispatch window Order Planner tab and you are seeing employees that shouldn&amp;#039;t be there, you can remove them by doing the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Got to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and double click on the user you want to remove from dispatch&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Hide In Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SME User will no long show on the Dispatch Calendar or in the Labor Editor technician field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HideInLists.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Subcontractors to Dispatch ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a subcontractor to the Dispatch Calendar and the Labor Editor technician field, go to the subcontractor&amp;#039;s vendor record and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use as Tech&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UseAsTech.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ordering Techs on Dispatch ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange the order in which your technicians display along the top of the Day Planner tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DayPlannerOrder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select a technician in the search window.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech Rating&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. Techs with the lowest number will be on the left of the Day Planner tab. Techs with the highest number will be on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TechnianSettings_TechRating.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are showing subcontractors in the dispatch window, you can arrange their order as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Vendors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select your subcontractor.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SubContractor Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech Rating&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Techs/Subs with the lowest number will be on the left of the Day Planner tab. The highest will be on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SubTechRating.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scheduling Conflict ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are scheduling a technician using the Labor Editor, you can&amp;#039;t see your technicians calendar to see if they are already scheduled for the time you are choosing. To have SME warn you if you are about to double book a technician, make sure you check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Conflict Message&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the user record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConflictMessage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Got to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select a user&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Conflict Message&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Technician Workgroups ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A work group is a group of users that can perform a specific function (ie: electricians, welders, repair) or technicians that work in a geographical area. Work groups are used in dispatch and also in the Labor Editor window.&lt;br /&gt;
In Dispatch, you can filter the technicians displayed on the Day Planner tab by Work Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FilterByWorkGroup.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Labor Editor, when you select a specific work group, your technician field will be filtered and only show you technicians in that group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LAborEidtorWorkGroup.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create new Work Groups and assign techs to groups&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Work Group Editor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the Work Group Editor window opens&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:WorkGroupEditor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and type the name for the new work group in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Work Group&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add From Technicians&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the technicians you want to add to the group. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. (To add multiple technicians, hold down your ctrl key and click on the multiple contacts and click OK.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.      To add subcontractors to the group, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add From Subcontractors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Chart tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:OrderChartTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The Order Chart tab is there so you can choose when you want to work on orders. You can drag orders from the unscheduled, install, or service tab at the bottom of dispatch and drag it to the Order Chart tab. Drag the order across the days you want to work on the order. When you do this, it updates the &amp;quot;Start Date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;End Date&amp;quot; on the Rates and Assignments tab on the order (image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Dragging the order to that tab doesn&amp;#039;t schedule any technicians. It is just organizing what jobs you want to work on when.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:StartDate_EndDate_OrderChart.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dispatch Refresh ==&lt;br /&gt;
When the dispatch window refreshes (updates) you will see the orders scheduled on your calendar blink and update with changes. By default, the dispatch is set to refresh continuous.  It&amp;#039;s the standard setting for most customers.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If the constant refresh doesn&amp;#039;t work for you due to the amount of data, you can change your refresh rate.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;System&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch Refresh (in seconds)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field and enter your refresh rate.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:FieldTechDispatchCalendar_RefreshRate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dispatch FAQ - Orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch there are a couple things to check:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;1. Check to see if the order status assigned to your orders has &amp;quot;show on dispatch&amp;quot; checked&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Statuses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Edit a status and make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show on Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked. If it isn&amp;#039;t, then any order with that status won&amp;#039;t show on dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ShowOnDispatch.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;2. Check settings on Dispatch &amp;gt; Settings tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Open Dispatch&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab at the bottom&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Dispatch_SettingsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Make sure All zones, All Workgroups, Service and Install are checked. If Don&amp;#039;t show completed items is checked, it won&amp;#039;t show labor associated with closed orders.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Dispatch_Guide&amp;diff=5486</id>
		<title>Dispatch Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Dispatch_Guide&amp;diff=5486"/>
		<updated>2014-08-28T22:48:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: /* Dispatch FAQ - Orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Dispatch Window allows you to schedule your technicians for work orders and view your technicians schedule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch the video below or continue reading below to get an orientation of dispatch, learn how to schedule orders on your techs schedule, and how to customize your dispatch layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;j546EsXlC2Q&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch Overview&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Dispatch window allows you to see your technician&amp;#039;s schedule and schedule orders on your tech&amp;#039;s calendar. To open the Dispatch window, click Dispatch in the Main Form Elements tab (circled below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MainFormElements_Dispatch.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Dispatch window is separated into different sections. See below for an orientation of the sections:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DispatchSections.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: -moz-use-text-color; border-collapse: collapse&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 45.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;61&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;26pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 432.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;577&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Calendar &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Select the day of the month you would like to see on the dispatch window.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Techs &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Shows your technicians. This view is used to drag techs onto the Order Planner tab&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vehicles &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Use this tab to drag your company’s vehicles onto the Order Planner tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 45.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;61&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;26pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 432.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;577&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Today’s Labor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – A list view of all labor scheduled for the day selected on the calendar.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Day Planner&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Displays each technician’s schedule for the day selected on the calendar. Move orders between technicians and expand/shrink order’s labor hours.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Week Planner&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – View the orders scheduled for technicians starting with the date selected on the calendar. Drag orders between techs and days.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Planner&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – View your open orders and drag technicians onto the orders. View by day, week, 2 weeks and month.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech ToDo List&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Create a list of to do’s for your techs. This is separate from the Activities window in SME.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unavailable Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Enter unavailable time for your technician. Prevent you from scheduling techs when they aren’t available.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 45.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;61&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;26pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 432.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;577&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unscheduled &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Shows all open orders that do not have labor scheduled yet. Drag and drop onto the dispatch calendar.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Proposals&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Shows all open proposals if Proposals is checked on the Settings tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Shows all open service orders if Service is checked on the Settings tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Install &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Shows all install orders if Install is checked on the Settings tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Shows all invoices if Invoice is checked on the Settings tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Use this tab to select what you are seeing on the Dispatch section. Filter your dispatch calendar by technician workgroups. Filter the orders that display on service, install and unscheduled by Zone If you have both Service and Install checked, the Day Planner tab will show you all service and install work scheduled on your tech’s schedule. If only Service is checked, you will only see service orders on your tech’s schedule.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Tabs ==&lt;br /&gt;
The tabs at the bottom of dipsatch show you open service orders, open install orders, open invoices, open proposals, as well as unscheduled orders (orders that don&amp;#039;t have a tech scheduled yet). Drag orders from the tabs on to the dispatch calendar to schedule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Orders won&amp;#039;t show on these tabs if the order status assigned to the order don&amp;#039;t have &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show On Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; checked. Go to setup &amp;gt; Company &amp;gt; Lists &amp;gt; Order Statuses. Edit the statuses to uncheck the Show on Dispatch option if you would like to reduce down the orders that show on these tabs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderTabs.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From these tabs, you can sort and filter your orders. Drag and drop the order onto the dispatch calendar to schedule your tech. On the Proposals, Service, Install and Invoices tab you can choose which columns you are viewing. For example, you may want to be able to sort your service orders by order status, due date, or order number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Choose columns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The views that you create in the Service &amp;amp; Install module &amp;gt; Services can be applied to the service tab in dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Right click on the column header.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Apply View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Select the search view. These search views listed are created in the Service Order Search window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ApplyView.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rearrange the order of the columns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can drag and drop columns in place:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DragColumns.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also click [[File:ColumnMgmt.jpg]] to rearrange columns and remove columns from the grid:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click [[File:ColumnMgmt.jpg]] in the upper left corner of the Service tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ColumnMgmtLarge.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       The columns will display in a list.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click on a column and drag it to the position you want in the list. Green arrows will indicate where you are dropping the column.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Uncheck any column to remove it from the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ColumnMgmtDisplay.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To learn more about setting up search views in SME, watch the searching tips video.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Filtering orders on tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to filtering your search views, click and type what you want to filter for below the column header as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FilterGrid.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering % after the word (e.g. tire%) you type will find everything in the column that begins with the word you typed.&lt;br /&gt;
Enter % before the word (e.g. %tire) you type will find the word anywhere in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scheduling Orders on Dispatch ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag an order from the tabs at the bottom of dispatch and drop it on the dispatch board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*NOTE* When you drag an order onto a tech’s schedule, a labor item is added to the order. Go to the service or install order, select the labor tab and notice the new labor item added.&lt;br /&gt;
To expand the hours scheduled on your tech’s calendar, click on the order scheduled, click on the bottom of the order (image below) and drag the order down the calendar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DragOnDispatch.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag the order from one technician’s schedule and drop on another tech’s schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rescheduling order on tech’s schedule to another day&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       On &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Day Planner&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select the order on your tech’s schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reschedule Labor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the window that opens, select the new date and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Order has been moved to your tech’s schedule on date selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reschedule.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Jump to order from dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double click on an order scheduled on your techs calendar and SME will jump to the order. This is an easy way to update all of the orders at the end of the day. From dispatch, jump to the orders that were scheduled for the day, update the order status and make other changes to the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Link between Dispatch and the Labor Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you add an order to your technician’s calendar in dispatch, a labor line item is added to the Labor tab on the order. It works the other way as well. In an order, if you go to the Labor tab and add new labor, the order is added to your tech’s calendar on dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Link.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Quick Schedule ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a service or install order, you can use Quick Schedule to quickly schedule a technician on dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QuickScheduleButton.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#       On the Details and Settings tab, click [[File:Q.jpg]].&lt;br /&gt;
#       The Labor Editor window will open. The Labor Editor access through the [[File:Q.jpg]]  button is a scaled down window and provides basic scheduling fields.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QuickScheduleLaborEditor.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Scheduled Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Start Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Scheduled Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the technician will be scheduled on dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dispatch Layouts ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dispatch there may be tabs you don’t use, such as the vehicles tab, technician’s tab, invoices tab and proposals tab. You can setup different layouts in SME showing you the tabs you want to see and switch between the layouts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;First it is a good idea to save the original layout in dispatch:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click [[File:SaveLayout.jpg]] next to the Layout field (image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SaveLayoutLg.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Layouts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New layout name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field, enter a name for the original layout. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SaveLayoutName.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the original layout is saved, you can create other layouts and always change back to the original layout using the Layouts dropdown.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LayoutDropdown.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Create another layout:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can close the tabs you don’t want to see in dispatch and save that view.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click the [[File:x.jpg]] in any of the tabs to remove the tabs from dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click  next to the Layout field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Layouts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New layout name field&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, enter a name for the original layout. Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To switch between saved layouts, use the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Layout&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field to select the layout you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Example of changing a simple part of dispatch layout&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A simple change that helps dispatch usability it to move the unscheduled tab from below the grid to above the grid as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:UnscheduledTabsOnTop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Right click on the Unscheduled tab and choose Top (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:RightClickOnUnscheduledTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Now you&amp;#039;ll need to save the layout. Click the second button to the right of the layouts drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AssignNewLayoutName.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. In the window that opens, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Enter a name for your view. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in Docking Setup window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Now it should have that view selected in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Layout&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; drop down and will be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;How to go back to original layout&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If your Dispatch layout has been altered and you wish to restore to the default layout please do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. In SME click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Help&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech Support Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Enter &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;833&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Delete the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Double click the folder with your user name.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Delete the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; folder in that folder as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Open the dispatch window in SME to see the original layout restored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding New Technicians ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you &amp;#039;&amp;#039;aren&amp;#039;t&amp;#039;&amp;#039; syncing timesheets, then you can simply add a new Technician by adding a user in SME and checking &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Is Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Either search for the user that needs to be a tech or create a new user&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Check the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Is Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; checkbox. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AddANewTech.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. On the Technician Settings tab, you will probably want to select a &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;default service item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for the technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Entering a new user in SME does not sync over to QuickBooks as an employee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you are syncing TechTime (SME Labor to QuickBooks timesheet entry), you must first enter the technician as an employee in QuickBooks and sync them to SME. They will show as an SME User and you will have to check&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Is Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in their user record. (&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;About TechTime syncing: http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink#Tech_Time_.28syncing_time_sheets_to_QB.29&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;You must log in to QuickBooks as the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Administrator&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;in &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Single User Mode&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;to export new employee&amp;#039;s from QuickBooks to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; . This is a QuickBooks requirement. If a sync has been processed, and QuickBooks is not logged in with a user that has employee editing permissions, you will need to do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*    Log in to QB as Admin or a user with employee editing permissions&lt;br /&gt;
*    Edit the employee in QB to reset the ‘is modified’ flag (i.e. add a period to the address)&lt;br /&gt;
*    Put QB in Single User mode&lt;br /&gt;
*    Run a sync&lt;br /&gt;
*    Return QB to multi-user mode&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When filling out a new employee in QuickBooks, make sure you fill out their &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;state&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If you do not, QuickBooks will enter &amp;quot;none&amp;quot; in their state which goes to SME as the state of &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;. If the employee is edited in SME, QuickBooks will reject the employee on export because it doesn&amp;#039;t recognize the state of &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Editing a user in SME doesn&amp;#039;t update the employee in QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Editing an employee in QuickBooks does update the user in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Entering a new user in SME does not sync over to QuickBooks as an employee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Remove Users from Dispatch Window ==&lt;br /&gt;
When you open the Dispatch window Order Planner tab and you are seeing employees that shouldn&amp;#039;t be there, you can remove them by doing the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Got to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and double click on the user you want to remove from dispatch&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Hide In Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SME User will no long show on the Dispatch Calendar or in the Labor Editor technician field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HideInLists.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Subcontractors to Dispatch ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a subcontractor to the Dispatch Calendar and the Labor Editor technician field, go to the subcontractor&amp;#039;s vendor record and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use as Tech&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UseAsTech.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ordering Techs on Dispatch ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange the order in which your technicians display along the top of the Day Planner tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DayPlannerOrder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select a technician in the search window.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech Rating&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. Techs with the lowest number will be on the left of the Day Planner tab. Techs with the highest number will be on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TechnianSettings_TechRating.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are showing subcontractors in the dispatch window, you can arrange their order as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Vendors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select your subcontractor.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SubContractor Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech Rating&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Techs/Subs with the lowest number will be on the left of the Day Planner tab. The highest will be on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SubTechRating.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scheduling Conflict ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are scheduling a technician using the Labor Editor, you can&amp;#039;t see your technicians calendar to see if they are already scheduled for the time you are choosing. To have SME warn you if you are about to double book a technician, make sure you check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Conflict Message&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the user record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConflictMessage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Got to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select a user&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Conflict Message&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Technician Workgroups ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A work group is a group of users that can perform a specific function (ie: electricians, welders, repair) or technicians that work in a geographical area. Work groups are used in dispatch and also in the Labor Editor window.&lt;br /&gt;
In Dispatch, you can filter the technicians displayed on the Day Planner tab by Work Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FilterByWorkGroup.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Labor Editor, when you select a specific work group, your technician field will be filtered and only show you technicians in that group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LAborEidtorWorkGroup.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create new Work Groups and assign techs to groups&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Work Group Editor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the Work Group Editor window opens&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:WorkGroupEditor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and type the name for the new work group in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Work Group&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add From Technicians&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the technicians you want to add to the group. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. (To add multiple technicians, hold down your ctrl key and click on the multiple contacts and click OK.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.      To add subcontractors to the group, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add From Subcontractors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Chart tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:OrderChartTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The Order Chart tab is there so you can choose when you want to work on orders. You can drag orders from the unscheduled, install, or service tab at the bottom of dispatch and drag it to the Order Chart tab. Drag the order across the days you want to work on the order. When you do this, it updates the &amp;quot;Start Date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;End Date&amp;quot; on the Rates and Assignments tab on the order (image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Dragging the order to that tab doesn&amp;#039;t schedule any technicians. It is just organizing what jobs you want to work on when.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:StartDate_EndDate_OrderChart.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dispatch Refresh ==&lt;br /&gt;
When the dispatch window refreshes (updates) you will see the orders scheduled on your calendar blink and update with changes. By default, the dispatch is set to refresh continuous.  It&amp;#039;s the standard setting for most customers.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If the constant refresh doesn&amp;#039;t work for you due to the amount of data, you can change your refresh rate.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;System&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch Refresh (in seconds)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field and enter your refresh rate.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:FieldTechDispatchCalendar_RefreshRate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dispatch FAQ - Orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch, there are a couple things to check:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;1. Check to see if the order status assigned to your orders has &amp;quot;show on dispatch&amp;quot; checked&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Statuses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Edit a status and make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show on Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked. If it isn&amp;#039;t, then any order with that status won&amp;#039;t show on dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ShowOnDispatch.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;2. Check settings on Dispatch &amp;gt; Settings tab&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Open Dispatch&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab at the bottom&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Dispatch_SettingsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Make sure All zones, All Workgroups, Service and Install are checked. If Don&amp;#039;t show completed items is checked, it won&amp;#039;t show labor associated with closed orders.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Dispatch_Guide&amp;diff=5485</id>
		<title>Dispatch Guide</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Dispatch_Guide&amp;diff=5485"/>
		<updated>2014-08-28T22:48:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;The Dispatch Window allows you to schedule your technicians for work orders and view your technicians schedule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Watch the video below or continue reading below to get an orientation of dispatch, learn how to schedule orders on your techs schedule, and how to customize your dispatch layout.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;j546EsXlC2Q&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch Overview&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Dispatch window allows you to see your technician&amp;#039;s schedule and schedule orders on your tech&amp;#039;s calendar. To open the Dispatch window, click Dispatch in the Main Form Elements tab (circled below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MainFormElements_Dispatch.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Dispatch window is separated into different sections. See below for an orientation of the sections:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DispatchSections.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: -moz-use-text-color; border-collapse: collapse&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 45.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;61&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;26pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;1&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 432.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;577&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Calendar &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Select the day of the month you would like to see on the dispatch window.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Techs &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Shows your technicians. This view is used to drag techs onto the Order Planner tab&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vehicles &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Use this tab to drag your company’s vehicles onto the Order Planner tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 45.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;61&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;26pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;2&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 432.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;577&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Today’s Labor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – A list view of all labor scheduled for the day selected on the calendar.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Day Planner&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Displays each technician’s schedule for the day selected on the calendar. Move orders between technicians and expand/shrink order’s labor hours.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Week Planner&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – View the orders scheduled for technicians starting with the date selected on the calendar. Drag orders between techs and days.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Planner&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – View your open orders and drag technicians onto the orders. View by day, week, 2 weeks and month.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech ToDo List&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Create a list of to do’s for your techs. This is separate from the Activities window in SME.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unavailable Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Enter unavailable time for your technician. Prevent you from scheduling techs when they aren’t available.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 45.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;61&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;font size=&amp;quot;26pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;3&amp;lt;/font&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
| style=&amp;quot;border-width: medium; border-style: none; border-color: rgb(240, 240, 240); padding: 0in 5.4pt; background-color: transparent; width: 432.9pt&amp;quot; width=&amp;quot;577&amp;quot; valign=&amp;quot;top&amp;quot; |&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Unscheduled &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Shows all open orders that do not have labor scheduled yet. Drag and drop onto the dispatch calendar.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Proposals&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Shows all open proposals if Proposals is checked on the Settings tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Services &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Shows all open service orders if Service is checked on the Settings tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Install &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab – Shows all install orders if Install is checked on the Settings tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoices&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Shows all invoices if Invoice is checked on the Settings tab.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab – Use this tab to select what you are seeing on the Dispatch section. Filter your dispatch calendar by technician workgroups. Filter the orders that display on service, install and unscheduled by Zone If you have both Service and Install checked, the Day Planner tab will show you all service and install work scheduled on your tech’s schedule. If only Service is checked, you will only see service orders on your tech’s schedule.&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;line-height: normal; margin: 0in 0in 0pt&amp;quot;&amp;gt; &amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Tabs ==&lt;br /&gt;
The tabs at the bottom of dipsatch show you open service orders, open install orders, open invoices, open proposals, as well as unscheduled orders (orders that don&amp;#039;t have a tech scheduled yet). Drag orders from the tabs on to the dispatch calendar to schedule. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - Orders won&amp;#039;t show on these tabs if the order status assigned to the order don&amp;#039;t have &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show On Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; checked. Go to setup &amp;gt; Company &amp;gt; Lists &amp;gt; Order Statuses. Edit the statuses to uncheck the Show on Dispatch option if you would like to reduce down the orders that show on these tabs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OrderTabs.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
From these tabs, you can sort and filter your orders. Drag and drop the order onto the dispatch calendar to schedule your tech. On the Proposals, Service, Install and Invoices tab you can choose which columns you are viewing. For example, you may want to be able to sort your service orders by order status, due date, or order number. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Choose columns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The views that you create in the Service &amp;amp; Install module &amp;gt; Services can be applied to the service tab in dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Right click on the column header.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Apply View&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Select the search view. These search views listed are created in the Service Order Search window.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ApplyView.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rearrange the order of the columns&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can drag and drop columns in place:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DragColumns.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also click [[File:ColumnMgmt.jpg]] to rearrange columns and remove columns from the grid:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click [[File:ColumnMgmt.jpg]] in the upper left corner of the Service tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ColumnMgmtLarge.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       The columns will display in a list.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click on a column and drag it to the position you want in the list. Green arrows will indicate where you are dropping the column.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Uncheck any column to remove it from the grid.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ColumnMgmtDisplay.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To learn more about setting up search views in SME, watch the searching tips video.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Filtering orders on tabs&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Similar to filtering your search views, click and type what you want to filter for below the column header as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FilterGrid.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Entering % after the word (e.g. tire%) you type will find everything in the column that begins with the word you typed.&lt;br /&gt;
Enter % before the word (e.g. %tire) you type will find the word anywhere in the field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scheduling Orders on Dispatch ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag an order from the tabs at the bottom of dispatch and drop it on the dispatch board.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*NOTE* When you drag an order onto a tech’s schedule, a labor item is added to the order. Go to the service or install order, select the labor tab and notice the new labor item added.&lt;br /&gt;
To expand the hours scheduled on your tech’s calendar, click on the order scheduled, click on the bottom of the order (image below) and drag the order down the calendar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DragOnDispatch.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Drag the order from one technician’s schedule and drop on another tech’s schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Rescheduling order on tech’s schedule to another day&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       On &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Day Planner&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select the order on your tech’s schedule.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reschedule Labor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the window that opens, select the new date and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Order has been moved to your tech’s schedule on date selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Reschedule.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Jump to order from dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Double click on an order scheduled on your techs calendar and SME will jump to the order. This is an easy way to update all of the orders at the end of the day. From dispatch, jump to the orders that were scheduled for the day, update the order status and make other changes to the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Link between Dispatch and the Labor Editor ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you add an order to your technician’s calendar in dispatch, a labor line item is added to the Labor tab on the order. It works the other way as well. In an order, if you go to the Labor tab and add new labor, the order is added to your tech’s calendar on dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Link.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Quick Schedule ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In a service or install order, you can use Quick Schedule to quickly schedule a technician on dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QuickScheduleButton.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
#       On the Details and Settings tab, click [[File:Q.jpg]].&lt;br /&gt;
#       The Labor Editor window will open. The Labor Editor access through the [[File:Q.jpg]]  button is a scaled down window and provides basic scheduling fields.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:QuickScheduleLaborEditor.jpg]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Scheduled Date&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Start Time&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Scheduled Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the technician will be scheduled on dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dispatch Layouts ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In dispatch there may be tabs you don’t use, such as the vehicles tab, technician’s tab, invoices tab and proposals tab. You can setup different layouts in SME showing you the tabs you want to see and switch between the layouts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;First it is a good idea to save the original layout in dispatch:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click [[File:SaveLayout.jpg]] next to the Layout field (image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SaveLayoutLg.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Layouts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New layout name&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field, enter a name for the original layout. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SaveLayoutName.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now that the original layout is saved, you can create other layouts and always change back to the original layout using the Layouts dropdown.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LayoutDropdown.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;Create another layout:&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can close the tabs you don’t want to see in dispatch and save that view.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Click the [[File:x.jpg]] in any of the tabs to remove the tabs from dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click  next to the Layout field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Layouts&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       In the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New layout name field&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;, enter a name for the original layout. Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
To switch between saved layouts, use the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Layout&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field to select the layout you want to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Example of changing a simple part of dispatch layout&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
A simple change that helps dispatch usability it to move the unscheduled tab from below the grid to above the grid as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:UnscheduledTabsOnTop.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Right click on the Unscheduled tab and choose Top (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:RightClickOnUnscheduledTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Now you&amp;#039;ll need to save the layout. Click the second button to the right of the layouts drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AssignNewLayoutName.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. In the window that opens, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Enter a name for your view. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in Docking Setup window&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Now it should have that view selected in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Layout&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; drop down and will be saved.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;How to go back to original layout&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If your Dispatch layout has been altered and you wish to restore to the default layout please do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. In SME click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Help&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech Support Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Enter &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;833&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Delete the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; folder.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Double click the folder with your user name.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Delete the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; folder in that folder as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Open the dispatch window in SME to see the original layout restored.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding New Technicians ==&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you &amp;#039;&amp;#039;aren&amp;#039;t&amp;#039;&amp;#039; syncing timesheets, then you can simply add a new Technician by adding a user in SME and checking &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Is Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Either search for the user that needs to be a tech or create a new user&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Check the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Is Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; checkbox. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AddANewTech.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. On the Technician Settings tab, you will probably want to select a &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;default service item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; for the technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Entering a new user in SME does not sync over to QuickBooks as an employee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you are syncing TechTime (SME Labor to QuickBooks timesheet entry), you must first enter the technician as an employee in QuickBooks and sync them to SME. They will show as an SME User and you will have to check&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Is Technician&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in their user record. (&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;About TechTime syncing: http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink#Tech_Time_.28syncing_time_sheets_to_QB.29&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;*&amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;You must log in to QuickBooks as the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Administrator&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;lt;/span&amp;gt;in &amp;lt;span style=&amp;quot;color: rgb(227, 108, 10);&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Single User Mode&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/span&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;to export new employee&amp;#039;s from QuickBooks to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; . This is a QuickBooks requirement. If a sync has been processed, and QuickBooks is not logged in with a user that has employee editing permissions, you will need to do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*    Log in to QB as Admin or a user with employee editing permissions&lt;br /&gt;
*    Edit the employee in QB to reset the ‘is modified’ flag (i.e. add a period to the address)&lt;br /&gt;
*    Put QB in Single User mode&lt;br /&gt;
*    Run a sync&lt;br /&gt;
*    Return QB to multi-user mode&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When filling out a new employee in QuickBooks, make sure you fill out their &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;state&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If you do not, QuickBooks will enter &amp;quot;none&amp;quot; in their state which goes to SME as the state of &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;. If the employee is edited in SME, QuickBooks will reject the employee on export because it doesn&amp;#039;t recognize the state of &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Editing a user in SME doesn&amp;#039;t update the employee in QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Editing an employee in QuickBooks does update the user in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Entering a new user in SME does not sync over to QuickBooks as an employee.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Remove Users from Dispatch Window ==&lt;br /&gt;
When you open the Dispatch window Order Planner tab and you are seeing employees that shouldn&amp;#039;t be there, you can remove them by doing the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Got to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and double click on the user you want to remove from dispatch&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Hide In Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SME User will no long show on the Dispatch Calendar or in the Labor Editor technician field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:HideInLists.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding Subcontractors to Dispatch ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a subcontractor to the Dispatch Calendar and the Labor Editor technician field, go to the subcontractor&amp;#039;s vendor record and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use as Tech&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:UseAsTech.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Ordering Techs on Dispatch ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can arrange the order in which your technicians display along the top of the Day Planner tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:DayPlannerOrder.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select a technician in the search window.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech Rating&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. Techs with the lowest number will be on the left of the Day Planner tab. Techs with the highest number will be on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:TechnianSettings_TechRating.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are showing subcontractors in the dispatch window, you can arrange their order as well.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#       Go to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Vendors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Vendors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Select your subcontractor.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SubContractor Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
#       Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech Rating&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Techs/Subs with the lowest number will be on the left of the Day Planner tab. The highest will be on the right.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:SubTechRating.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Scheduling Conflict ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are scheduling a technician using the Labor Editor, you can&amp;#039;t see your technicians calendar to see if they are already scheduled for the time you are choosing. To have SME warn you if you are about to double book a technician, make sure you check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Conflict Message&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the user record.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ConflictMessage.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Got to the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select a user&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Conflict Message&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Technician Workgroups ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A work group is a group of users that can perform a specific function (ie: electricians, welders, repair) or technicians that work in a geographical area. Work groups are used in dispatch and also in the Labor Editor window.&lt;br /&gt;
In Dispatch, you can filter the technicians displayed on the Day Planner tab by Work Group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FilterByWorkGroup.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In the Labor Editor, when you select a specific work group, your technician field will be filtered and only show you technicians in that group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:LAborEidtorWorkGroup.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Create new Work Groups and assign techs to groups&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Work Group Editor&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the Work Group Editor window opens&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:WorkGroupEditor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and type the name for the new work group in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Work Group&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the top.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add From Technicians&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the technicians you want to add to the group. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. (To add multiple technicians, hold down your ctrl key and click on the multiple contacts and click OK.)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.      To add subcontractors to the group, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add From Subcontractors&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8.      Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Order Chart tab ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:OrderChartTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The Order Chart tab is there so you can choose when you want to work on orders. You can drag orders from the unscheduled, install, or service tab at the bottom of dispatch and drag it to the Order Chart tab. Drag the order across the days you want to work on the order. When you do this, it updates the &amp;quot;Start Date&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;End Date&amp;quot; on the Rates and Assignments tab on the order (image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Dragging the order to that tab doesn&amp;#039;t schedule any technicians. It is just organizing what jobs you want to work on when.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:StartDate_EndDate_OrderChart.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dispatch Refresh ==&lt;br /&gt;
When the dispatch window refreshes (updates) you will see the orders scheduled on your calendar blink and update with changes. By default, the dispatch is set to refresh continuous.  It&amp;#039;s the standard setting for most customers.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If the constant refresh doesn&amp;#039;t work for you due to the amount of data, you can change your refresh rate.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;System&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Dispatch Refresh (in seconds)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field and enter your refresh rate.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:FieldTechDispatchCalendar_RefreshRate.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Dispatch FAQ - Orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your orders aren&amp;#039;t showing on dispatch, there are a couple things to check:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;1. Check to see if the order status assigned to your orders has &amp;quot;show on dispatch&amp;quot; checked&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Statuses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Edit a status and make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show on Dispatch&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked. If it isn&amp;#039;t, then any order with that status won&amp;#039;t show on dispatch.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ShowOnDispatch.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h2&amp;gt;2. Check settings on Dispatch &amp;gt; Settings tab&amp;lt;/h2&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Open Dispatch&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab at the bottom&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Dispatch_SettingsTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Make sure All zones, All Workgroups, Service and Install are checked. If Don&amp;#039;t show completed items is checked, it won&amp;#039;t show labor associated with closed orders.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:Dispatch_SettingsTab.png&amp;diff=5484</id>
		<title>File:Dispatch SettingsTab.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:Dispatch_SettingsTab.png&amp;diff=5484"/>
		<updated>2014-08-28T22:46:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:ShowOnDispatch.png&amp;diff=5483</id>
		<title>File:ShowOnDispatch.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:ShowOnDispatch.png&amp;diff=5483"/>
		<updated>2014-08-28T22:43:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory_Quantity_Reconciliation&amp;diff=5482</id>
		<title>Inventory Quantity Reconciliation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Inventory_Quantity_Reconciliation&amp;diff=5482"/>
		<updated>2014-08-25T16:22:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Usually at year end a physical inventory is performed and then reconciled with SME. Any adjustments required should be understood, however SME provides an inventory reconcile tool.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*NOTE* If you are tracking inventory quantities in QuickBooks, any adjustments made to SME inventory using reconciliation will also need to be made in QuickBooks inventory.  Only invoices from SME automatically deplete inventory in QuickBooks. Only POs or Bills from SME automatically increase inventory in QuickBooks. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjusting a single inventory item ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are adjusting a single inventory item, you can open the Inventory Reconciliation window from the inventory item.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to the Inventory item in SME.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Actions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Reconciliation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Inventory Reconciliation window opens for that item only.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ActionsInventoryReconciliation.png]]&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. In Inventory Reconciliation window, you will need to expand the item (first arrow below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Expand the warehouse the stock is in (second arrow below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Type the accurate amount of stock in the warehouse in Physical Count column (circled below) and then hit &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on your keyboard. After you hit tab, the next column shows you the adjusted amount and the Accept column is checked.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Post Changes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the bottom.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InventoryReconciliationFromItem.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Alternative to manage stock adjustments ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Another option for adjusting stock quantities for inventory items is to setup a separate warehouse in SME to move the excess stock to. This way, if the adjustment was done in error, it is very simply to move the stock back to your working warehouse location. When you do your usual physical count, set the ‘Stock Adjustment’ warehouse counts to zero using the inventory reconciliation utility.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Set up a new warehouse and name it Stock Adjustment or something similar:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Go to the Setup Module and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Locate Warehouses in the Lookup Lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the lower right corner.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Enter the new &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;warehouse&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; name such as Stock Adjustment.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;u&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;To move stock out of working warehouses into Stock Adjustment warehouse:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;lt;/u&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Locate the inventory item with wrong stock quantities.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Select the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Material Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4.       Enter the quantity to move and select the new warehouse from the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Destination&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; drop down.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5.       Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:MoveStockAdjustment.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You will now have a detail line showing the stock adjustment. You will need to inform users to not use the stock in the ‘Stock Adjustments’ warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adjusting multiple inventory items ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to Inventory module and select the item you need to adjust.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Copy the Item Number.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ItemNumber.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;NOTE&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; – If your Item Names are unique, you can use that and substitute Name for Number for the remainder of the procedure.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;(1)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;(2)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Reconciliation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;(3)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Run It (4&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:ReconciliationSteps.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Inventory Reconciliation&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; window will open listing all of your inventory items.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Click [[File:DownArrow.jpg]] in the Number column header and select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;(Custom..)&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:FilterByNumber.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7.  In the Custom Filter window, enter the Item Number in the field circled in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EnterNumber.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Notice the inventory list filtered down to the item you need to adjust.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Click [[File:PlusSign.jpg]] on the inventory item row (1 in image below).  The editing window will expand.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10. Click [[File:PlusSign.jpg]] to expand the warehouse locations. (2)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11. Enter the accurate inventory count in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Physical Count&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Bold text&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column (3).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12. Check the box in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Accept&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13.  Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Post Changes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (4).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:PhysicalCount.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;14. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to message in Information window.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;15. When the screen clears, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Close&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The quantities will be adjusted.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Mobile_-_Preference_Groups&amp;diff=5481</id>
		<title>SME Mobile - Preference Groups</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Mobile_-_Preference_Groups&amp;diff=5481"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T22:04:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;In SME Mobile Tech you have the ability to show or hide fields or set various preferences. The preference group the user is assigned to determines their preferences in SME Mobile Tech.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To set your preference groups, check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use Group Preferences&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMEMobile_UseGroupPreference.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit Group Preferences&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMEMobile_EditGroupPreferences.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You will find three preference groups already created. You can use these or create your own.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add New Preference Group&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to create your own and edit preferences&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMEMobile_AddNewPreferenceGroup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Enter a name and description for your Preference Group&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (you might need to navigate away from that page and return to see your group added to the list)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; next to your new preference group.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;The Details Tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; lists out all the fields you can set to Show, Hide, or Non-Edit. Choose the option you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;You can arrange the order of the fields on the Details tab by clicking on the Field Name and dragging it into position. The fields at the top of the list would be at the top of the Details tab on SME Mobile Tech.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:OrderOfDetailFields.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Notes/Documents Tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; allows you to choose if the Services Requested, Services Performed and Site Notes are Show, Hide or Non-Edit&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;--Site Notes are entered on the customer record in SME under Notes &amp;gt; site notes. It would be notes about the job site that you want your tech to be able to see on any work order you create for that site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMEMobilePreference_NotesDocs.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Bottom Tabs section is where you can hide the following buttons from the bottom of the work order (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMEMobilePreference_BottomTabs.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UI Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; : Append Edit Service Fields Preference&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMEMobile_AppendEditServiceFields.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UI Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: Show Customer Docs&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show only order level documents&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - tech would see stored documents added to the order only.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Show&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - tech would see any doc added to the customer or to any other order for the customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;UI Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: User or Admin Email&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use SME Admin Email settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If the tech emails from SME Mobile, the email would be sent from the email set on the Admin user in SME (setup &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Admin User &amp;gt; Email settings tab)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Use SME User Email Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If the tech emails from SME Mobile, the email would be sent from the User&amp;#039;s email (SME setup &amp;gt; users. Search for the user. Set email credentials on the Email Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Item Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ItemSettings_CostPrice.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Cost&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - set to hide, show or non-edit. Costs show on the items on the order (material, labor, service items.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Price&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - set to hide, show or non-edit. Price shows on the items on the order (material, labor, service items.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouse&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - This determines which inventory items a user can add to the order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- All Locations - This setting shows all items from inventory&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- My Location Only - This setting will only show the tech inventory items that are available in their own warehouse (the tech&amp;#039;s warehouse is assigned to the tech in Setup &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; technician settings tab &amp;gt; Warehouse) - image below&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TechPortal_TechWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- My Location with Options for Others - This setting allows the tech to choose what warehouse they are pulling stock from (their own warehouse, another techs warehouse, or the main warehouse)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Once the preferences are set, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Save All&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; at the top of the Preference Group&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SaveSMEMobilePreferenceGroup.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Assign preference group to your users:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Home&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in upper right&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Manage Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Choose the preference group for each user (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMEMobile_AssignPreferenceGroupToUser.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:OrderOfDetailFields.png&amp;diff=5480</id>
		<title>File:OrderOfDetailFields.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:OrderOfDetailFields.png&amp;diff=5480"/>
		<updated>2014-08-15T22:03:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Warehouses&amp;diff=5479</id>
		<title>Warehouses</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Warehouses&amp;diff=5479"/>
		<updated>2014-08-11T22:27:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: /* Retiring a warehouse and moving all stock to a new warehouse */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you are tracking inventory items in SME, it is likely that you have more than one warehouse you want to track stock in such as your technicians vehicles.  SME allows you to create multiple warehouses. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Default Warehouse (main warehouse) you keep and receive stock into.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Technician warehouses to track stock on your techs trucks/ vans&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Customer Warehouses to hold stock that can only be allocated on orders for a specific customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default Warehouse ==&lt;br /&gt;
In SME, there is a warehouse called Default. When creating new inventory items this will be used as the Default Location. You should enter your default warehouse address so it shows correctly on POs created from service and install orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Enter the Default Warehouse Address&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Locate &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Lists&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the right and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Enter the address in the window that opens. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DefaultLocationAddress.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you want to change the name to something other than &amp;quot;Default&amp;quot; you can.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technician Warehouses ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to track stock in your technicians trucks you will need to create the technician warehouses.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Locate &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Lists&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower right corner and enter the Warehouse name.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AddTechWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Assign techs their default warehouse for use on TechPortal and TechService on Android for SME&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using TechPortal or TechService on Android for SME, you will need to assign the technician warehouse in the tech User. That way, when your tech adds stock from TechPortal or TechService on Android, SME will allocate stock from your technician&amp;#039;s default warehouse, rather than the item&amp;#039;s default warehouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To set a default warehouse for your technician: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the technician. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouse&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field and select the warehouse you use for your technician&amp;#039;s truck. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TechPortal_TechWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding stock to Technician Warehouse&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to manually add stock to your technician&amp;#039;s warehouse rather than transfer from your default warehouse or place a purchase order, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to an inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Stock Tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Stock Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Choose the Warehouse and enter the quantity you want to add in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and stock will be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Transferring stock from Default to Technician Warehouse&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Move one Item at a time&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to Inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Material Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select the line on the grid that contains the stock lot that contains the stock you want to move. Make sure you are selecting stock in the correct location and notice how many are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. In the Move Stock window, enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Choose the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Destination&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the stock will be moved.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MoveStockIndividually.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Move multiple items at once&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. To move multiple items at once, you will need to create a transfer record, select the items and quantities, and transfer them.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Source&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Destination&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; fields. In the Source field, select the warehouse you are transferring stock from. In the Destination field, choose the warehouse you are transferring stock to. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:NewTransferRecord.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the Transfer Details tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AddItemsToTranfer.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. In the window that opens you will see the material available to move in the Source warehouse. Select the item you need to transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. In the next window you will see shows the stock lots for the inventory item. Double click on the stock lot you want to transfer from. Note the quantity available in each stock lot. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ChooseStockLotToAddToTransfer.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you don’t see an “Available” column, click Views &amp;gt; Add Remove Fields&amp;gt; From Material Details and choose “Available” and click OK. The column will be added to the search view.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Once selected, you will see the item on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10. Enter the quantity you want to transfer in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Available&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column. You can’t enter more than the quantity in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Current Available&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:EnterMoveAvailabel.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11. Continue adding the inventory items you want to include on the transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12. When all items are added, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer All Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TransferAllItemsButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13. The stock will be moved and the return will close.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;View Report showing Quantity in Technician Warehouses&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To see a summary of stock available in your technician&amp;#039;s warehouses you can view the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standard Inventory by Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; report.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print Report&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standar Inventory by Location Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:RunStandardInventoryByLocationReprot.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Enter &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to filter by a specific Technician&amp;#039;s warehouse and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:StandardInventoryByLocation.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Warehouses ==&lt;br /&gt;
Customer warehouses are used if you want to keep stock in a warehouse that can only be allocated to orders for a specific customer. You will need to designate a warehouse as a customer warehouse and assign the warehouse to your customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Create Customer Warehouse&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Locate &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower right corner and enter the Warehouse name.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and enter the warehouse address.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SettingUpCustomerWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Assign the warehouse to customer&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to the customer record &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select the customers warehouse in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AssignCustomerWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Transferring stock from Default to Customer Warehouses&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to an Inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Material Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select the line on the grid that contains the stock lot that contains the stock you want to move. Make sure you are selecting stock in the correct location and notice how many are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. In the Move Stock window, enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Choose the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Destination&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; warehouse which is your Customer&amp;#039;s warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the stock will be moved.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MoveStockIndividually.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default Warehouse Location on Inventory Items ==&lt;br /&gt;
In each inventory item you select a default location. This is used in several ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DefaultLocationField.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-- When adding the item to an order, SME will will try to allocate stock from the default location. If no stock available in the default location the Link Status will go to Has JIT and you’ll have to see if any stock available in other warehouses.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-- When receiving stock on a PO, the warehouse you receive the stock into is the Default location. It can be changed before you receive the item as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-- When placing a purchase order for the item from a service order, SME will use the default location as the default shipping location. (images below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DefaultShippingLocation.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:POShippingTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Receiving stock into correct warehouse on PO ==&lt;br /&gt;
When receiving stock on a PO, you can choose which warehouse you are receiving the stock into.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to the PO&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PO Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select the item you want to receive and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. In the Receive PO Item window locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouse&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. You can change the location as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReceiveItemIntoCorrectWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Warehouse Zones ==&lt;br /&gt;
SME will support an organization spread over geographic zones and covering multiple divisions. If you have a large organization covering the west coast area with different divisions for Washington state, Oregon, San Francisco, and Los Angeles it wouldn&amp;#039;t make sense to try to utilize parts in a Washington warehouse for a job in LA. SME zones can help manage these different divisions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In order to setup SME to handle these geographically dispursed divisions, you want to setup Zones for each division. Once you setup zones, you should assign warehouses for each zone including a default warehouse for the zone. You can also assign customers to zones, technician to zones, subcontractors to zones, workgroup to zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; If a customer has a zone, then any order created for the customer will have the zone. If an order has a zone, then material added to the order will try to allocate stock from the default warehouse for that zone rather than the inventory item’s default location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Setup Zones&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Zones&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower right corner to add the various Zones you need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;To setup warehouses for your zones&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
On service or install orders with a zone, when you add material to the order SME will try to allocate stock from the default warehouse for the Zone rather than the default location on the inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select a warehouse and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to enter a new one&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select a &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Zone&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default warehouse for Zone&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; as needed &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Enter the Shipping address for the warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SetupDefaultWarehouseForZone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Retiring a warehouse and moving all stock to a new warehouse ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower left&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Enter a name for your new warehouse and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. This will be the warehouse you are moving stock into from the &amp;quot;retired&amp;quot; warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Select the warehouse you are &amp;quot;retiring&amp;quot; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Uncheck &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;is active&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:InactiveWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- You will be prompted to pick a new location for all the stock in the inactive warehouse. Choose the new warehouse you just created. All items from the &amp;quot;inactive&amp;quot; warehouse will move to the new one selected.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PickWarehouseForOnHandStock.png]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:InactiveWarehouse.png&amp;diff=5478</id>
		<title>File:InactiveWarehouse.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:InactiveWarehouse.png&amp;diff=5478"/>
		<updated>2014-08-11T22:26:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:PickWarehouseForOnHandStock.png&amp;diff=5477</id>
		<title>File:PickWarehouseForOnHandStock.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=File:PickWarehouseForOnHandStock.png&amp;diff=5477"/>
		<updated>2014-08-11T22:26:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Warehouses&amp;diff=5476</id>
		<title>Warehouses</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Warehouses&amp;diff=5476"/>
		<updated>2014-08-11T22:24:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: /* Retiring a warehouse and moving all stock to a new warehouse */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you are tracking inventory items in SME, it is likely that you have more than one warehouse you want to track stock in such as your technicians vehicles.  SME allows you to create multiple warehouses. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Default Warehouse (main warehouse) you keep and receive stock into.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Technician warehouses to track stock on your techs trucks/ vans&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Customer Warehouses to hold stock that can only be allocated on orders for a specific customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default Warehouse ==&lt;br /&gt;
In SME, there is a warehouse called Default. When creating new inventory items this will be used as the Default Location. You should enter your default warehouse address so it shows correctly on POs created from service and install orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Enter the Default Warehouse Address&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Locate &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Lists&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the right and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Enter the address in the window that opens. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DefaultLocationAddress.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you want to change the name to something other than &amp;quot;Default&amp;quot; you can.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technician Warehouses ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to track stock in your technicians trucks you will need to create the technician warehouses.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Locate &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Lists&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower right corner and enter the Warehouse name.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AddTechWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Assign techs their default warehouse for use on TechPortal and TechService on Android for SME&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using TechPortal or TechService on Android for SME, you will need to assign the technician warehouse in the tech User. That way, when your tech adds stock from TechPortal or TechService on Android, SME will allocate stock from your technician&amp;#039;s default warehouse, rather than the item&amp;#039;s default warehouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To set a default warehouse for your technician: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the technician. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouse&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field and select the warehouse you use for your technician&amp;#039;s truck. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TechPortal_TechWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding stock to Technician Warehouse&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to manually add stock to your technician&amp;#039;s warehouse rather than transfer from your default warehouse or place a purchase order, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to an inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Stock Tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Stock Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Choose the Warehouse and enter the quantity you want to add in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and stock will be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Transferring stock from Default to Technician Warehouse&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Move one Item at a time&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to Inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Material Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select the line on the grid that contains the stock lot that contains the stock you want to move. Make sure you are selecting stock in the correct location and notice how many are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. In the Move Stock window, enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Choose the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Destination&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the stock will be moved.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MoveStockIndividually.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Move multiple items at once&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. To move multiple items at once, you will need to create a transfer record, select the items and quantities, and transfer them.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Source&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Destination&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; fields. In the Source field, select the warehouse you are transferring stock from. In the Destination field, choose the warehouse you are transferring stock to. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:NewTransferRecord.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the Transfer Details tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AddItemsToTranfer.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. In the window that opens you will see the material available to move in the Source warehouse. Select the item you need to transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. In the next window you will see shows the stock lots for the inventory item. Double click on the stock lot you want to transfer from. Note the quantity available in each stock lot. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ChooseStockLotToAddToTransfer.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you don’t see an “Available” column, click Views &amp;gt; Add Remove Fields&amp;gt; From Material Details and choose “Available” and click OK. The column will be added to the search view.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Once selected, you will see the item on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10. Enter the quantity you want to transfer in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Available&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column. You can’t enter more than the quantity in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Current Available&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:EnterMoveAvailabel.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11. Continue adding the inventory items you want to include on the transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12. When all items are added, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer All Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TransferAllItemsButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13. The stock will be moved and the return will close.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;View Report showing Quantity in Technician Warehouses&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To see a summary of stock available in your technician&amp;#039;s warehouses you can view the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standard Inventory by Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; report.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print Report&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standar Inventory by Location Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:RunStandardInventoryByLocationReprot.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Enter &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to filter by a specific Technician&amp;#039;s warehouse and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:StandardInventoryByLocation.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Warehouses ==&lt;br /&gt;
Customer warehouses are used if you want to keep stock in a warehouse that can only be allocated to orders for a specific customer. You will need to designate a warehouse as a customer warehouse and assign the warehouse to your customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Create Customer Warehouse&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Locate &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower right corner and enter the Warehouse name.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and enter the warehouse address.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SettingUpCustomerWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Assign the warehouse to customer&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to the customer record &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select the customers warehouse in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AssignCustomerWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Transferring stock from Default to Customer Warehouses&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to an Inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Material Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select the line on the grid that contains the stock lot that contains the stock you want to move. Make sure you are selecting stock in the correct location and notice how many are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. In the Move Stock window, enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Choose the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Destination&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; warehouse which is your Customer&amp;#039;s warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the stock will be moved.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MoveStockIndividually.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default Warehouse Location on Inventory Items ==&lt;br /&gt;
In each inventory item you select a default location. This is used in several ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DefaultLocationField.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-- When adding the item to an order, SME will will try to allocate stock from the default location. If no stock available in the default location the Link Status will go to Has JIT and you’ll have to see if any stock available in other warehouses.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-- When receiving stock on a PO, the warehouse you receive the stock into is the Default location. It can be changed before you receive the item as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-- When placing a purchase order for the item from a service order, SME will use the default location as the default shipping location. (images below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DefaultShippingLocation.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:POShippingTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Receiving stock into correct warehouse on PO ==&lt;br /&gt;
When receiving stock on a PO, you can choose which warehouse you are receiving the stock into.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to the PO&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PO Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select the item you want to receive and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. In the Receive PO Item window locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouse&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. You can change the location as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReceiveItemIntoCorrectWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Warehouse Zones ==&lt;br /&gt;
SME will support an organization spread over geographic zones and covering multiple divisions. If you have a large organization covering the west coast area with different divisions for Washington state, Oregon, San Francisco, and Los Angeles it wouldn&amp;#039;t make sense to try to utilize parts in a Washington warehouse for a job in LA. SME zones can help manage these different divisions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In order to setup SME to handle these geographically dispursed divisions, you want to setup Zones for each division. Once you setup zones, you should assign warehouses for each zone including a default warehouse for the zone. You can also assign customers to zones, technician to zones, subcontractors to zones, workgroup to zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; If a customer has a zone, then any order created for the customer will have the zone. If an order has a zone, then material added to the order will try to allocate stock from the default warehouse for that zone rather than the inventory item’s default location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Setup Zones&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Zones&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower right corner to add the various Zones you need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;To setup warehouses for your zones&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
On service or install orders with a zone, when you add material to the order SME will try to allocate stock from the default warehouse for the Zone rather than the default location on the inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select a warehouse and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to enter a new one&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select a &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Zone&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default warehouse for Zone&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; as needed &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Enter the Shipping address for the warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SetupDefaultWarehouseForZone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Retiring a warehouse and moving all stock to a new warehouse ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower left&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Enter a name for your new warehouse and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. This will be the warehouse you are moving stock into from the &amp;quot;retired&amp;quot; warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Select the warehouse you are &amp;quot;retiring&amp;quot; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Uncheck &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;is active&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- You will be prompted to pick a new location for all the stock in the inactive warehouse. Choose the new warehouse you just created. All items from the &amp;quot;inactive&amp;quot; warehouse will move to the new one selected.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Warehouses&amp;diff=5475</id>
		<title>Warehouses</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Warehouses&amp;diff=5475"/>
		<updated>2014-08-11T22:23:59Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;If you are tracking inventory items in SME, it is likely that you have more than one warehouse you want to track stock in such as your technicians vehicles.  SME allows you to create multiple warehouses. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Default Warehouse (main warehouse) you keep and receive stock into.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Technician warehouses to track stock on your techs trucks/ vans&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Customer Warehouses to hold stock that can only be allocated on orders for a specific customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default Warehouse ==&lt;br /&gt;
In SME, there is a warehouse called Default. When creating new inventory items this will be used as the Default Location. You should enter your default warehouse address so it shows correctly on POs created from service and install orders.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Enter the Default Warehouse Address&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Locate &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Lists&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the right and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Enter the address in the window that opens. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DefaultLocationAddress.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you want to change the name to something other than &amp;quot;Default&amp;quot; you can.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technician Warehouses ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to track stock in your technicians trucks you will need to create the technician warehouses.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Locate &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Lists&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower right corner and enter the Warehouse name.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AddTechWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Assign techs their default warehouse for use on TechPortal and TechService on Android for SME&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using TechPortal or TechService on Android for SME, you will need to assign the technician warehouse in the tech User. That way, when your tech adds stock from TechPortal or TechService on Android, SME will allocate stock from your technician&amp;#039;s default warehouse, rather than the item&amp;#039;s default warehouse. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To set a default warehouse for your technician: &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Search Active Users&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and select the technician. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Technician Settings&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouse&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field and select the warehouse you use for your technician&amp;#039;s truck. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TechPortal_TechWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Adding stock to Technician Warehouse&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to manually add stock to your technician&amp;#039;s warehouse rather than transfer from your default warehouse or place a purchase order, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to an inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click the&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Stock Tab&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New Stock Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Choose the Warehouse and enter the quantity you want to add in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Add Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and stock will be added.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Transferring stock from Default to Technician Warehouse&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Move one Item at a time&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to Inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Material Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select the line on the grid that contains the stock lot that contains the stock you want to move. Make sure you are selecting stock in the correct location and notice how many are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. In the Move Stock window, enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Choose the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Destination&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the stock will be moved.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MoveStockIndividually.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h4&amp;gt;Move multiple items at once&amp;lt;/h4&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. To move multiple items at once, you will need to create a transfer record, select the items and quantities, and transfer them.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Source&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Destination&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; fields. In the Source field, select the warehouse you are transferring stock from. In the Destination field, choose the warehouse you are transferring stock to. (image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:NewTransferRecord.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the Transfer Details tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AddItemsToTranfer.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. In the window that opens you will see the material available to move in the Source warehouse. Select the item you need to transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;8. In the next window you will see shows the stock lots for the inventory item. Double click on the stock lot you want to transfer from. Note the quantity available in each stock lot. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ChooseStockLotToAddToTransfer.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you don’t see an “Available” column, click Views &amp;gt; Add Remove Fields&amp;gt; From Material Details and choose “Available” and click OK. The column will be added to the search view.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;9. Once selected, you will see the item on the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;10. Enter the quantity you want to transfer in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Available&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column. You can’t enter more than the quantity in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Current Available&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; column.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:EnterMoveAvailabel.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;11. Continue adding the inventory items you want to include on the transfer.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;12. When all items are added, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Transfer All Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:TransferAllItemsButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;13. The stock will be moved and the return will close.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;View Report showing Quantity in Technician Warehouses&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
To see a summary of stock available in your technician&amp;#039;s warehouses you can view the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standard Inventory by Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; report.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reports&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print Report&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Standar Inventory by Location Qty&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:RunStandardInventoryByLocationReprot.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Enter &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to filter by a specific Technician&amp;#039;s warehouse and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Print&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:StandardInventoryByLocation.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Warehouses ==&lt;br /&gt;
Customer warehouses are used if you want to keep stock in a warehouse that can only be allocated to orders for a specific customer. You will need to designate a warehouse as a customer warehouse and assign the warehouse to your customer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Create Customer Warehouse&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Orders&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Locate &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Lists.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower right corner and enter the Warehouse name.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Customers&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and enter the warehouse address.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SettingUpCustomerWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Assign the warehouse to customer&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to the customer record &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select the customers warehouse in the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Location&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:AssignCustomerWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Transferring stock from Default to Customer Warehouses&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to an Inventory item&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Material Details&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select the line on the grid that contains the stock lot that contains the stock you want to move. Make sure you are selecting stock in the correct location and notice how many are available.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Stock&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. In the Move Stock window, enter the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Move Quantity&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6. Choose the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Destination&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; warehouse which is your Customer&amp;#039;s warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the stock will be moved.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:MoveStockIndividually.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Default Warehouse Location on Inventory Items ==&lt;br /&gt;
In each inventory item you select a default location. This is used in several ways.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DefaultLocationField.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-- When adding the item to an order, SME will will try to allocate stock from the default location. If no stock available in the default location the Link Status will go to Has JIT and you’ll have to see if any stock available in other warehouses.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-- When receiving stock on a PO, the warehouse you receive the stock into is the Default location. It can be changed before you receive the item as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-- When placing a purchase order for the item from a service order, SME will use the default location as the default shipping location. (images below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:DefaultShippingLocation.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:POShippingTab.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Receiving stock into correct warehouse on PO ==&lt;br /&gt;
When receiving stock on a PO, you can choose which warehouse you are receiving the stock into.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to the PO&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;PO Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select the item you want to receive and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Receive Item&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. In the Receive PO Item window locate the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouse&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; field. You can change the location as needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReceiveItemIntoCorrectWarehouse.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Warehouse Zones ==&lt;br /&gt;
SME will support an organization spread over geographic zones and covering multiple divisions. If you have a large organization covering the west coast area with different divisions for Washington state, Oregon, San Francisco, and Los Angeles it wouldn&amp;#039;t make sense to try to utilize parts in a Washington warehouse for a job in LA. SME zones can help manage these different divisions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In order to setup SME to handle these geographically dispursed divisions, you want to setup Zones for each division. Once you setup zones, you should assign warehouses for each zone including a default warehouse for the zone. You can also assign customers to zones, technician to zones, subcontractors to zones, workgroup to zones.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; If a customer has a zone, then any order created for the customer will have the zone. If an order has a zone, then material added to the order will try to allocate stock from the default warehouse for that zone rather than the inventory item’s default location.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;Setup Zones&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Zones&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower right corner to add the various Zones you need.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;h3&amp;gt;To setup warehouses for your zones&amp;lt;/h3&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
On service or install orders with a zone, when you add material to the order SME will try to allocate stock from the default warehouse for the Zone rather than the default location on the inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1. Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; module &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2. Select a warehouse and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; or click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to enter a new one&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3. Select a &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Zone&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Default warehouse for Zone&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; as needed &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4. Enter the Shipping address for the warehouse&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SetupDefaultWarehouseForZone.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Retiring a warehouse and moving all stock to a new warehouse ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
- Go to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Setup&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Company&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
- Select &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Warehouses&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;New&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in lower left&lt;br /&gt;
- Enter a name for your new warehouse and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. This will be the warehouse you are moving stock into from the &amp;quot;retired&amp;quot; warehouse.&lt;br /&gt;
- Select the warehouse you are &amp;quot;retiring&amp;quot; and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
- Uncheck &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;is active&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
- You will be prompted to pick a new location for all the stock in the inactive warehouse. Choose the new warehouse you just created. All items from the &amp;quot;inactive&amp;quot; warehouse will move to the new one selected.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Mobile_Prerequisites&amp;diff=5473</id>
		<title>SME Mobile Prerequisites</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SME_Mobile_Prerequisites&amp;diff=5473"/>
		<updated>2014-08-06T16:11:03Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;SME Mobile Prerequisites:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SME:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          SME must be updated to the latest version of SME 8.0&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SME Web Services:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          The server or computer running SME Mobile Web Services&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1.       Must have IIS feature installed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2.       Must be Windows server 2008+ or Windows 7 + OS Pro&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          Must have Dot Net 4.5 role installed and enabled&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          Does not need to be the same server as the SQL/SME server, but must be on same network&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          Must be available 24/7 with a static IP address&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Router:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          Your router must be set up with port forwarding for the computer/server static IP and port 215&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          The following link may be useful for assisting with your port forwarding setup&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          http://www.pcwintech.com/port-forwarding-guides&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          You must be able to test your router with the following site and have the status show as open&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          http://www.yougetsignal.com/tools/open-ports/&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          [[File:Port215Open.png]] Your IP&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          If you cannot complete the port forwarding on your router you must have the router login info for the High5 Tech&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;SME Mobile Wiki Links:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          When your SME Mobile application is installed and configured the Administrator account will be set up and the log in info passed to your SME administrator of record&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          We advise waiting until you have arranged training with our staff before making any administrative changes&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          SME Mobile User Setup wiki link:[[SME Mobile Master - Assign User Names]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-          Setting up Preference Groups [[SME Mobile - Preference Groups]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_FAQ&amp;diff=5472</id>
		<title>SQLink FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_FAQ&amp;diff=5472"/>
		<updated>2014-08-04T21:33:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: /* Changing Pay Method */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WARNING:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Fixed Total option on Items and syncing warning to QuickBooks ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using &amp;quot;Fixed Total&amp;quot; on Service, Material, or Labor items you must be aware that the Total Price is what gets fixed in the SME Item. You can change the Unit Price or Quantity and the total price will stay the same in SME for that item. If you invoice the item and the invoice goes to QuickkBooks, the Unit Price and Qty are sent over on the invoice which potentially could be different than the fixed total price if you edited the Unit Price or Qty in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Do I have to have all QuickBooks users out of QuickBooks when I sync SME and QuickBooks? ==&lt;br /&gt;
No, you only need to get everyone out of QuickBooks for 3 scenarios:&lt;br /&gt;
#To do your initial sync between SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
#Reassigning parent/sites (only do in QB)&lt;br /&gt;
#Exporting employees from QuickBooks to SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I keep my invoice numbers in SME and QuickBooks in sync? ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before creating any invoices in QuickBooks, make sure the invoices from SME are synced over to QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
#Create Invoices in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
#Full Sync SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create invoices in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
#Full Sync SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
To read in more detail, go to [[Invoice Numbers in SME and QuickBooks]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== My Next Invoice number is a large wrong number ==&lt;br /&gt;
If there is an invoice number in QuickBooks that is higher than all the others, when you sync with SME QB will give that number to SME as the next invoice number (+1). Go into QuickBooks and locate the invoice that has the high invoice number and change it so it will stop prompting SME to use that number as the next invoice number.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- locate the high numbers in QB&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- change them&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- delete the SME invoices and recreate with the correct seq #&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== When re-invoicing an order, I want to use a different invoice number ==&lt;br /&gt;
When you invoice an order, SME will put the invoice number on the totals tab. If you rollback the invoice and invoice the order again, SME will use the same invoice number on the next invoice. To use the next invoice number in SME instead, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reset&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button circled below and then generate the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ResetInvoiceNumber.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Can I enter text and numbers in my invoice numbers? ==&lt;br /&gt;
QuickBooks allows you to enter text in an invoice number. However when those invoices are synced to SME, the text is stripped out. In SME you can only have numbers in your invoice number field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I change customer job sites (move to new parent customer) ==&lt;br /&gt;
See this video to move customers as job sites under another Billable or Parent customer.  This would be done in the case that job sites are first imported into QuickBooks and then you need to move them as job sites. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Do not move customers that have a history of invoices and payments.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;ah7Nn6jUFlw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How are opening balances in QuickBooks synced to SME? ==&lt;br /&gt;
SME uses Invoices and Payments to calculate customer balances. Customer balances entered into QuickBooks will need to be entered as invoices, as they are when the Opening Balance is entered when creating a new customer in QuickBooks (circled in the image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OpeningBalanceField.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter an opening balance for a customer in QuickBooks, after syncing the balance will carry over to SME and show in the Customer record &amp;gt; Accounts tab&amp;gt; Current field. When payment is received in QuickBooks for the opening balance, the payment will sync to SME and the amount in the Customer record &amp;gt; Accounts tab &amp;gt; Current field will be reduced by the payment amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the opening balance is entered as a GL transaction, it will not sync properly with SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OpeningBalance.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I add new technicians? ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are syncing with QuickBooks, you must add new technicians as an Employee in QuickBooks and sync with SME. The Employee will sync to SME as a User. Check &amp;quot;Is Technician&amp;quot; in the user record to turn the user into a Technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When filling out a new employee in QuickBooks, make sure you fill out their &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;state&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If you do not, QuickBooks will enter &amp;quot;none&amp;quot; in their state which goes to SME as the state of &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;. If the employee is edited in SME, QuickBooks will reject the employee on export because it doesn&amp;#039;t recognize the state of &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Set QB to Single User Mode&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the new employee in QuickBooks&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Sync SME and QuickBooks&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already added the employee to QB and a sync has been processed but the employee is not in SME, do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Edit the employee in QB, make a minor change to the address to force QB to reset the modified flag&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Put QB in Admin/Single User&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Run a sync&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I enter a subcontractor? ==&lt;br /&gt;
In SME, a subcontractor is a vendor with the &amp;quot;Is Subcontractor&amp;quot; checkbox checked. QuickBooks will not let us export a Vendor to QuickBooks as a subcontractor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Add vendors in QB&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Sync to SME&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Set as Subcontractor in QB &amp;amp; SME (In SME, check &amp;quot;Is Subcontractor&amp;quot; in the vendor record on the Details and Settings tab as shown in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:IsSubcontractor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Map (assign) accounts and thresholds to 1099 categories&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;http://support.quickbooks.intuit.com/support/pages/inproducthelp/Core/QB2K8/ContentPackage/Payroll/1099/popup_1099pref_table.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== My Non-Tax items in SME are going to the wrong tax account on the QB invoice.(Exempt)  ==&lt;br /&gt;
This is an issue from the QB Sales Tax List, in QB, under &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales Tax Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The order of the codes determines what get’s selected on the invoice. We’re only allowed to pass Tax/Non Tax and QB picks from that list. If yours looks like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QB_Sales_Tax_Codes.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; And ‘EXE’ is the first ‘non’ tax item in the list then, Non Tax items from SME will be listed as ‘EXE’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; If your list looks like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sales_TAx_List.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Then your non tax items will be listed as ‘NON’&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; I’ve had customers change that to XMT, to move it to the bottom of the list, and then it will flow correctly for items on the invoice. One of the anomalies of syncing applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete invoice, PO, labor in SME doesn&amp;#039;t delete record in QuickBooks ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you delete an invoice in SME and the invoice already synced to QuickBooks, you will need to delete the invoice in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you delete a PO in SME and the PO synced to QuickBooks already, you will need to delete the PO in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you delete labor item in SME and the timesheet already synced to QuickBooks, you will need to delete the timesheet labor entry in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== If I delete a record in SME and sync with QB, will the record come back into SME? ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a synced record that is in SME and in QB and you delete the record in SME, the record will stay in QB only unless the record gets edited in QB. If the record is edited in QB it will come back into SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: If you set the record as inactive in SME it will go inactive in QB which is the preferred method.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What are the types of invoices that can be created in SME? ==&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a service or install order, you can choose how you are going to invoice it. You can invoice the whole order at once, part of the items on the order at a time, or even make it a fixed rate invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click this link for details: http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Invoicing#Types_of_Invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What are all of these SMP Item added to my QuickBooks Item List? ==&lt;br /&gt;
After your initial sync between SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks, you will see some &amp;quot;SMP_&amp;quot; Items in your QuickBooks Item List as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMPItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;These items are default items used to pass income to your income accounts used and expenses through to your accounts if items do not have accounts assigned on them.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;For example, if you have an inventory item in SME but you don’t have it in QuickBooks, then SQLink will pass the income through the SMP_Item when you invoice that inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click [[SMP Items]] for more details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do invoices sync to QB? ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Syncing SME Invoices with QuickBooks]] for information on how to setup invoices to sync to QB by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do subcontractor costs sync over to QB? ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you select a subcontractor on labor or on a service item, you can have a bill go over to QB for the cost on the labor item or the service item. The bill can go over to QB either when the order is closed or when the invoice is created for the order. If it goes over to QB when the order is closed, the bill date will be the DateTime In on the order. If it goes over when the invoice is created, then the date on the bill will be the Invoice date. Once the bill is in QB you can edit the bill or delete it and it won&amp;#039;t affect SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;click this link to view details: http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings#Export_Options_for_Subcontractors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How can I track labor costs in SME over in QB? ==&lt;br /&gt;
SME labor item records sync with QuickBooks weekly time sheet. Customer name and job number are transferred. Time sheets must be turned on in QuickBooks to use this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click this link to learn more: http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink#Tech_Time_.28syncing_time_sheets_to_QB.29&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Labor is getting taxed and it shouldn&amp;#039;t ==&lt;br /&gt;
First go to QB and make sure SMP_Labor item is set as non-taxable. If it wasn&amp;#039;t non-taxable already, then sync SME &amp;amp; QB. (In QB click Lists &amp;gt; Item Lists. Open SMP_Labor and make sure non-taxable)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Then go to the labor item on the order that is being taxed and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;non-taxable&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Then go to the service item in SME that is being used on the labor and make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;non-taxable&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked (Inventory module &amp;gt; Services &amp;gt; Search for service item). Going forward, when you create work orders and add labor with that service item, it will default to non-taxable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== I can&amp;#039;t see the service orders in QuickBooks ==&lt;br /&gt;
That is correct. Your service orders will be in SME only and do not sync to QB. When you invoice the service or install order, the invoice will sync to QuickBooks. Use SME to review all of your service order history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cannot sync SME with an Accountant&amp;#039;s Copy of QuickBooks ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are attempting to sync SME with an Accountant&amp;#039;s Copy of QuickBooks, you won&amp;#039;t be able to sync. You will receive message in SQLink that certain modules are locked so cannot sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is an Accountant&amp;#039;s Copy?:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;http://support.quickbooks.intuit.com/support/pages/inproducthelp/Core/QB2K12/ContentPackage/Core/File_Accountant_Copy/ov_acct_working_with.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink tech codes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Occasionally data in SME may need to be re-linked to the matching data in QB.  Running the following tech codes will remove the flag that tells SQLink the items have been synced. This will result in all items for the specified code to be re-synced. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: if you do this for a module that has a significant amount of information the next sync will take a considerable length of time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To run a code, open SQLink and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Help&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech Support Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. In the window that opens, enter the code.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Then run a full sync. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: if you do this for a module that has a significant amount of information the next sync will take a considerable length of time.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SQLink_TechSupportUtilities.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;155 - Clears the last terms merge date&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;175 - Clears the last customer merge date&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;265 - Clears the last vendor merge date, so we can bring in old 1099 vendors as subcontractors (based on options)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;715 - Clears the Last Merge Flag on QB Proposal import.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;815 - Clear out export date on business types&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;908 - Clear Last invoice Merge&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;909 - Clear Last Payment Merge&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1026 - Clears Last Inventory Merge to re-initialize the inventory QB IDs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I force SQLink to close if it is stuck open? ==&lt;br /&gt;
In SQLink, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Help&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech Support Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the window that opens, enter 807&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Material on my SME invoice didn&amp;#039;t go over to my QB invoice ==&lt;br /&gt;
If this happens, most likely there aren&amp;#039;t any material details for the material on the service order linked to the SME Invoice. To resolve:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Go to the service order / install order in SME related to the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Select the material and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Add Item to Order window that opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- You will probably be prompted with the following message: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Item Not Found&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Add to Inventory. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Now go back to the invoice in SME and check Export to QB and sync the invoice back over to QuickBooks. The material should be on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This issue happens if you do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- In an order, you click Add Material.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- In search window that opens, you click Cancel.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- In the Add Item to Order window, you enter a name etc. for the items and click OK&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- &amp;quot;The message Inventory Item Not Found. Add to Inventory&amp;quot; opens and if you click No. Then the message &amp;quot;Item could not be found. Use it anyway?&amp;quot; and if you click Yes then the material will be added with no material detail and it won&amp;#039;t go over on the invoice to QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you need to add parts to orders on the fly but don&amp;#039;t want them to be added to inventory, create one inventory item called &amp;quot;Material&amp;quot; or something similar. When on an order that needs a part you don&amp;#039;t want to track in inventory, add this placeholder item you created and change the description of the material to match what you need and change the price.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Are there QuickBooks Tutorials available? ==&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a link to a QuickBooks Certified User Study Guide that may be helpful: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.certiport.com/Portal/Common/DocumentLibrary/QuickBooks_CUser_Study_Guide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Site Address is populating with Billing Address After Sync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomerEmptyAddress2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerEmptyAddress2_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To stop the billing address from populating the site, you need to put something in the Address1 line in SME such as a &amp;quot;.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The rule is if there is no information in line2 of the shipping address in QuickBooks, then the site address will populate with the Billing Address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerEmptyAddress2_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Changing Pay Method ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you add or inactivate a Pay Method in QuickBooks you will need to import the pay method change into SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Open SQLink,  SME and QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Data Functions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Import QuickBooks Data&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This will import the Pay Method change.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_FAQ&amp;diff=5471</id>
		<title>SQLink FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink_FAQ&amp;diff=5471"/>
		<updated>2014-08-04T21:32:11Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;== &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;WARNING:&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Fixed Total option on Items and syncing warning to QuickBooks ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using &amp;quot;Fixed Total&amp;quot; on Service, Material, or Labor items you must be aware that the Total Price is what gets fixed in the SME Item. You can change the Unit Price or Quantity and the total price will stay the same in SME for that item. If you invoice the item and the invoice goes to QuickkBooks, the Unit Price and Qty are sent over on the invoice which potentially could be different than the fixed total price if you edited the Unit Price or Qty in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Do I have to have all QuickBooks users out of QuickBooks when I sync SME and QuickBooks? ==&lt;br /&gt;
No, you only need to get everyone out of QuickBooks for 3 scenarios:&lt;br /&gt;
#To do your initial sync between SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
#Reassigning parent/sites (only do in QB)&lt;br /&gt;
#Exporting employees from QuickBooks to SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I keep my invoice numbers in SME and QuickBooks in sync? ==&lt;br /&gt;
Before creating any invoices in QuickBooks, make sure the invoices from SME are synced over to QuickBooks:&lt;br /&gt;
#Create Invoices in SME.&lt;br /&gt;
#Full Sync SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
#Create invoices in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
#Full Sync SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
To read in more detail, go to [[Invoice Numbers in SME and QuickBooks]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== My Next Invoice number is a large wrong number ==&lt;br /&gt;
If there is an invoice number in QuickBooks that is higher than all the others, when you sync with SME QB will give that number to SME as the next invoice number (+1). Go into QuickBooks and locate the invoice that has the high invoice number and change it so it will stop prompting SME to use that number as the next invoice number.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- locate the high numbers in QB&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- change them&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- delete the SME invoices and recreate with the correct seq #&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== When re-invoicing an order, I want to use a different invoice number ==&lt;br /&gt;
When you invoice an order, SME will put the invoice number on the totals tab. If you rollback the invoice and invoice the order again, SME will use the same invoice number on the next invoice. To use the next invoice number in SME instead, click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Reset&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button circled below and then generate the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ResetInvoiceNumber.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Can I enter text and numbers in my invoice numbers? ==&lt;br /&gt;
QuickBooks allows you to enter text in an invoice number. However when those invoices are synced to SME, the text is stripped out. In SME you can only have numbers in your invoice number field.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I change customer job sites (move to new parent customer) ==&lt;br /&gt;
See this video to move customers as job sites under another Billable or Parent customer.  This would be done in the case that job sites are first imported into QuickBooks and then you need to move them as job sites. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Do not move customers that have a history of invoices and payments.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;videoflash&amp;gt;ah7Nn6jUFlw&amp;lt;/videoflash&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How are opening balances in QuickBooks synced to SME? ==&lt;br /&gt;
SME uses Invoices and Payments to calculate customer balances. Customer balances entered into QuickBooks will need to be entered as invoices, as they are when the Opening Balance is entered when creating a new customer in QuickBooks (circled in the image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OpeningBalanceField.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you enter an opening balance for a customer in QuickBooks, after syncing the balance will carry over to SME and show in the Customer record &amp;gt; Accounts tab&amp;gt; Current field. When payment is received in QuickBooks for the opening balance, the payment will sync to SME and the amount in the Customer record &amp;gt; Accounts tab &amp;gt; Current field will be reduced by the payment amount.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the opening balance is entered as a GL transaction, it will not sync properly with SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:OpeningBalance.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I add new technicians? ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are syncing with QuickBooks, you must add new technicians as an Employee in QuickBooks and sync with SME. The Employee will sync to SME as a User. Check &amp;quot;Is Technician&amp;quot; in the user record to turn the user into a Technician.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - When filling out a new employee in QuickBooks, make sure you fill out their &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;state&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. If you do not, QuickBooks will enter &amp;quot;none&amp;quot; in their state which goes to SME as the state of &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;. If the employee is edited in SME, QuickBooks will reject the employee on export because it doesn&amp;#039;t recognize the state of &amp;quot;no&amp;quot;.&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Set QB to Single User Mode&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Add the new employee in QuickBooks&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Sync SME and QuickBooks&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you already added the employee to QB and a sync has been processed but the employee is not in SME, do the following:&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Edit the employee in QB, make a minor change to the address to force QB to reset the modified flag&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Put QB in Admin/Single User&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Run a sync&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I enter a subcontractor? ==&lt;br /&gt;
In SME, a subcontractor is a vendor with the &amp;quot;Is Subcontractor&amp;quot; checkbox checked. QuickBooks will not let us export a Vendor to QuickBooks as a subcontractor. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Add vendors in QB&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
2. Sync to SME&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
3. Set as Subcontractor in QB &amp;amp; SME (In SME, check &amp;quot;Is Subcontractor&amp;quot; in the vendor record on the Details and Settings tab as shown in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:IsSubcontractor.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Map (assign) accounts and thresholds to 1099 categories&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;http://support.quickbooks.intuit.com/support/pages/inproducthelp/Core/QB2K8/ContentPackage/Payroll/1099/popup_1099pref_table.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== My Non-Tax items in SME are going to the wrong tax account on the QB invoice.(Exempt)  ==&lt;br /&gt;
This is an issue from the QB Sales Tax List, in QB, under &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Lists&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Sales Tax Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. The order of the codes determines what get’s selected on the invoice. We’re only allowed to pass Tax/Non Tax and QB picks from that list. If yours looks like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QB_Sales_Tax_Codes.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; And ‘EXE’ is the first ‘non’ tax item in the list then, Non Tax items from SME will be listed as ‘EXE’.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; If your list looks like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:Sales_TAx_List.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; Then your non tax items will be listed as ‘NON’&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt; I’ve had customers change that to XMT, to move it to the bottom of the list, and then it will flow correctly for items on the invoice. One of the anomalies of syncing applications.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete invoice, PO, labor in SME doesn&amp;#039;t delete record in QuickBooks ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you delete an invoice in SME and the invoice already synced to QuickBooks, you will need to delete the invoice in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you delete a PO in SME and the PO synced to QuickBooks already, you will need to delete the PO in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you delete labor item in SME and the timesheet already synced to QuickBooks, you will need to delete the timesheet labor entry in QuickBooks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== If I delete a record in SME and sync with QB, will the record come back into SME? ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have a synced record that is in SME and in QB and you delete the record in SME, the record will stay in QB only unless the record gets edited in QB. If the record is edited in QB it will come back into SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: If you set the record as inactive in SME it will go inactive in QB which is the preferred method.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What are the types of invoices that can be created in SME? ==&lt;br /&gt;
When creating a service or install order, you can choose how you are going to invoice it. You can invoice the whole order at once, part of the items on the order at a time, or even make it a fixed rate invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click this link for details: http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Invoicing#Types_of_Invoices&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== What are all of these SMP Item added to my QuickBooks Item List? ==&lt;br /&gt;
After your initial sync between SME &amp;amp; QuickBooks, you will see some &amp;quot;SMP_&amp;quot; Items in your QuickBooks Item List as shown in the image below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SMPItems.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;These items are default items used to pass income to your income accounts used and expenses through to your accounts if items do not have accounts assigned on them.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;For example, if you have an inventory item in SME but you don’t have it in QuickBooks, then SQLink will pass the income through the SMP_Item when you invoice that inventory item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click [[SMP Items]] for more details&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do invoices sync to QB? ==&lt;br /&gt;
Click [[Syncing SME Invoices with QuickBooks]] for information on how to setup invoices to sync to QB by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do subcontractor costs sync over to QB? ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you select a subcontractor on labor or on a service item, you can have a bill go over to QB for the cost on the labor item or the service item. The bill can go over to QB either when the order is closed or when the invoice is created for the order. If it goes over to QB when the order is closed, the bill date will be the DateTime In on the order. If it goes over when the invoice is created, then the date on the bill will be the Invoice date. Once the bill is in QB you can edit the bill or delete it and it won&amp;#039;t affect SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;click this link to view details: http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=Default_Export_to_QuickBooks_Settings#Export_Options_for_Subcontractors&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How can I track labor costs in SME over in QB? ==&lt;br /&gt;
SME labor item records sync with QuickBooks weekly time sheet. Customer name and job number are transferred. Time sheets must be turned on in QuickBooks to use this feature.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Click this link to learn more: http://high5software.com/mediawiki/index.php?title=SQLink#Tech_Time_.28syncing_time_sheets_to_QB.29&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Labor is getting taxed and it shouldn&amp;#039;t ==&lt;br /&gt;
First go to QB and make sure SMP_Labor item is set as non-taxable. If it wasn&amp;#039;t non-taxable already, then sync SME &amp;amp; QB. (In QB click Lists &amp;gt; Item Lists. Open SMP_Labor and make sure non-taxable)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Then go to the labor item on the order that is being taxed and check &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;non-taxable&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Then go to the service item in SME that is being used on the labor and make sure &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;non-taxable&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; is checked (Inventory module &amp;gt; Services &amp;gt; Search for service item). Going forward, when you create work orders and add labor with that service item, it will default to non-taxable.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== I can&amp;#039;t see the service orders in QuickBooks ==&lt;br /&gt;
That is correct. Your service orders will be in SME only and do not sync to QB. When you invoice the service or install order, the invoice will sync to QuickBooks. Use SME to review all of your service order history.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Cannot sync SME with an Accountant&amp;#039;s Copy of QuickBooks ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you are attempting to sync SME with an Accountant&amp;#039;s Copy of QuickBooks, you won&amp;#039;t be able to sync. You will receive message in SQLink that certain modules are locked so cannot sync.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;What is an Accountant&amp;#039;s Copy?:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;http://support.quickbooks.intuit.com/support/pages/inproducthelp/Core/QB2K12/ContentPackage/Core/File_Accountant_Copy/ov_acct_working_with.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== SQLink tech codes ==&lt;br /&gt;
Occasionally data in SME may need to be re-linked to the matching data in QB.  Running the following tech codes will remove the flag that tells SQLink the items have been synced. This will result in all items for the specified code to be re-synced. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: if you do this for a module that has a significant amount of information the next sync will take a considerable length of time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To run a code, open SQLink and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Help&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech Support Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. In the window that opens, enter the code.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;Then run a full sync. &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;: if you do this for a module that has a significant amount of information the next sync will take a considerable length of time.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:SQLink_TechSupportUtilities.png]] &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;155 - Clears the last terms merge date&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;175 - Clears the last customer merge date&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;265 - Clears the last vendor merge date, so we can bring in old 1099 vendors as subcontractors (based on options)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;715 - Clears the Last Merge Flag on QB Proposal import.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;815 - Clear out export date on business types&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;908 - Clear Last invoice Merge&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;909 - Clear Last Payment Merge&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1026 - Clears Last Inventory Merge to re-initialize the inventory QB IDs&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== How do I force SQLink to close if it is stuck open? ==&lt;br /&gt;
In SQLink, click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Help&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; &amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Tech Support Utilities&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;In the window that opens, enter 807&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== The Material on my SME invoice didn&amp;#039;t go over to my QB invoice ==&lt;br /&gt;
If this happens, most likely there aren&amp;#039;t any material details for the material on the service order linked to the SME Invoice. To resolve:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Go to the service order / install order in SME related to the invoice&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Select the material and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Edit&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;OK&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; in the Add Item to Order window that opens.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- You will probably be prompted with the following message: &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Inventory Item Not Found&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Add to Inventory. Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Yes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Now go back to the invoice in SME and check Export to QB and sync the invoice back over to QuickBooks. The material should be on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;This issue happens if you do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- In an order, you click Add Material.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- In search window that opens, you click Cancel.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- In the Add Item to Order window, you enter a name etc. for the items and click OK&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- &amp;quot;The message Inventory Item Not Found. Add to Inventory&amp;quot; opens and if you click No. Then the message &amp;quot;Item could not be found. Use it anyway?&amp;quot; and if you click Yes then the material will be added with no material detail and it won&amp;#039;t go over on the invoice to QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;If you need to add parts to orders on the fly but don&amp;#039;t want them to be added to inventory, create one inventory item called &amp;quot;Material&amp;quot; or something similar. When on an order that needs a part you don&amp;#039;t want to track in inventory, add this placeholder item you created and change the description of the material to match what you need and change the price.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Are there QuickBooks Tutorials available? ==&lt;br /&gt;
Here is a link to a QuickBooks Certified User Study Guide that may be helpful: &amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
http://www.certiport.com/Portal/Common/DocumentLibrary/QuickBooks_CUser_Study_Guide.pdf&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Customer Site Address is populating with Billing Address After Sync ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:CustomerEmptyAddress2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerEmptyAddress2_2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;To stop the billing address from populating the site, you need to put something in the Address1 line in SME such as a &amp;quot;.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;The rule is if there is no information in line2 of the shipping address in QuickBooks, then the site address will populate with the Billing Address.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:CustomerEmptyAddress2_3.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Changing Pay Method ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you add or inactivate a Pay Method in QuickBooks you will need to import the pay method change into SME.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Open SQLink,  SME and QuickBooks&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;- Click&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Data Functions&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;gt; &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Import QuickBooks Data&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Editing_a_Combined_Invoice&amp;diff=5466</id>
		<title>Editing a Combined Invoice</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://www.high5software.com//mediawiki/index.php?title=Editing_a_Combined_Invoice&amp;diff=5466"/>
		<updated>2014-07-29T23:32:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Amy: /* Delete an item off a combined invoice */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;***&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;SME Invoices need to be edited in SME. QuickBooks invoices need to be edited in QuickBooks.&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;***&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to edit a combined invoice in SME, you will need to go to the order that is on that invoice,  edit the order and the invoice for the order will be updated. There are four main scenarios for editing combined invoices described below. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Adding additional items to the combined invoice ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have an invoiced order and you need to add additional items to the order and the invoice, you can do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Go to the invoiced order and click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Order Items&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab. You will see the items that have already been fully invoiced (circled in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:FullyInvoicedOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Add the new item to the order. Notice the order status will change from Invoiced to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Partially Invoiced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; and the item you added will have a Inv State of &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Not Invoiced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. (circled in image below)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If you are adding material to the order, you will need to reserve stock for the item to deplete the stock used on the order.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - You will want to refresh the taxes. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Taxes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, unlock taxes and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Refresh&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. On later versions of SME, the Lock Tax checkbox will be automatically unchecked on an order when rolling back an invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:PartiallyInvoicedOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button and the following happens:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QuickInvoiceButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-  The order will change from &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Partially Invoiced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Invoiced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-  The Inv State of the added item will change to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Fully Invoiced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-   The invoice in SME will be updated and set to sync to QB on the next sync (&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export to QB&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; checkbox is checked on the SME invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:FullyReInvoicedOrder.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) On the next sync with QuickBooks, the original invoice will be deleted from QB and the updated one added to QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Increase item quantity on a combined invoice ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you need to increase the quantity of an item on a combined invoice, do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Go to the order and click the Order Items tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Open the item and increase the quantity as needed. Click OK.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) Notice the order changes from &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoiced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Partially Invoiced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. Also notice Inv State on the item changes from &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Fully Invoiced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Partial Invoiced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; (Image below).&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - If it is an inventory item you are increase the quantity of, you will need to reserve stock for the added quantity.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Note&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; - You will want to refresh the taxes. Click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Taxes&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; tab, unlock taxes and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Refresh&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:IncreaseItemQuantity.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) click the &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; button and the following happens:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:QuickInvoiceButton.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-  The order will change from &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Partially Invoiced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; Invoiced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-  The Inv State of the added item will change to &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Fully Invoiced&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;-   The invoice in SME will be updated and set to sync to QB on the next sync (&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Export to QB&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; checkbox is checked on the SME invoice)&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:ReinvoicedItemIncrease.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) On the next sync with QuickBooks, the original invoice will be deleted from QB and the updated one added to QB.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Delete an item off a combined invoice ==&lt;br /&gt;
If you have an invoiced order and you need to delete an item that has been fully invoiced off the order and the invoice, you can do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;1) Go to the invoice and click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Delete/Void&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; on the invoice.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;2) Go to the Service Order. That status of the order will be back to closed&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;3) The items on the order will be Not Invoiced&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;[[File:RolledBackOrder_NotInvoiced.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;4) Delete the item or reduce quantities of items on the order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;5) Click &amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039;Invoice&amp;#039;&amp;#039;&amp;#039; to invoice the order&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;6) The invoice will be generated and keep the same invoice number&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;br&amp;gt;7) Sync with QuickBooks.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Amy</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>